You are on page 1of 228

BTL-4000

Series
SERVICE MANUAL

v100TN01/07/2004EN
BTL-4000
Series
USER’S MANUAL

v100z1TN05/22/2004EN
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

Dear Customer,

Thank you for buying our medical equipment of the BTL-4000


Series. We hope that you will be satisfied with our product and
that thanks to you it will help many patients.

We are interested in your experience with this equipment and


your view on possible improvements. That is why we beg to ask
you for filling in the enclosed customer card and sending it back
to us. Your comments will be a feedback thanks to which we
can manufacture our products as good as possible.

We wish you much success at your work.

Best regards,

BTL Industries Limited


Manufacturer of BTL devices

page 2 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

CONTENTS

1 GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS ........................................................................................................................5


2 INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE.................................................................................................................................6
2.1 Description of the Device ...............................................................................................................................6
2.1.1 Top Panel .................................................................................................................................................6
2.1.2 Rear Panel ...............................................................................................................................................8
2.1.3 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................10
2.2 Assembly and Putting into Operation ...........................................................................................................11
2.3 Basic Operating of the Device......................................................................................................................12
2.4 Therapy (principle of Setting) .......................................................................................................................13
2.4.1 Therapy Setting Flowchart......................................................................................................................13
2.4.2 Opening Screen and Selection of Channels, Tabs, Accessories............................................................14
2.4.3 Setting of Therapy Parameters by Selection of Diagnosis – "diag" button .............................................14
2.4.4 Setting of Therapy Parameters by Selection of Program – "prog" button ...............................................16
2.4.5 User Setting of Therapy Parameters –"man" button...............................................................................16
2.4.5.1 Therapy Parameters Screen.............................................................................................................18
2.4.5.2 Setting of Therapy Time....................................................................................................................18
2.4.5.3 Setting of Intensity of Therapy ..........................................................................................................18
2.5 Course of Therapy .......................................................................................................................................19
2.5.1 Start, Interruption and End of Therapy ...................................................................................................19
2.5.2 Running Therapy Screen........................................................................................................................20
2.5.3 Electrotherapy – Setting during Therapy ................................................................................................20
2.5.3.1 Setting the Intensity in 4-Electrode Therapies ..................................................................................20
2.5.3.2 Manual Turning of Vector in Dipole Interference...............................................................................20
2.5.4 Accessories –Signalling of Operation .....................................................................................................21
2.5.5 Indication of Operation – Energy on Output ...........................................................................................21
2.5.5.1 Electrotherapy...................................................................................................................................21
2.5.5.2 Ultrasound Therapy ..........................................................................................................................22
2.5.5.3 Laser Therapy...................................................................................................................................22
2.6 Therapy Parameters ....................................................................................................................................22
2.7 Encyclopaedia..............................................................................................................................................23
2.8 Therapy Saving ............................................................................................................................................23
2.9 Interconnection of Devices...........................................................................................................................26
2.9.1 Interconnection of BTL-4000 Puls (Combi) and BTL vac........................................................................26
2.9.2 Interconnection of BTL-4000 Puls and BTL-4000 Sono .........................................................................26
2.9.3 Interconnection of BTL-4000 Puls, BTL-4000 Sono and BTL vac ..........................................................27
2.9.4 Setting and Running of Combined Therapy on Single Devices ..............................................................28
2.9.5 End of Combined Therapy on Single Devices ........................................................................................28
3 "MENU" BUTTON.............................................................................................................................................29
3.1 Menu ............................................................................................................................................................29
3.1.1 Accessories ............................................................................................................................................29
3.1.1.1 Accessories Installation ....................................................................................................................29
3.1.1.2 Information on Accessories...............................................................................................................29
3.1.1.3 Connectors - Information ..................................................................................................................30
3.1.2 Unit Settings ...........................................................................................................................................30
3.1.2.1 Password Setting..............................................................................................................................30
3.1.2.2 Sound Setting ...................................................................................................................................30
3.1.2.3 Auto Switch Off .................................................................................................................................30
3.1.2.4 Setting of Display Contrast ...............................................................................................................31
3.1.2.5 Setting Contrast for Small Display ....................................................................................................31
3.1.2.6 Setting Backlight ...............................................................................................................................31
3.1.2.7 Date and Time Setting ......................................................................................................................31
3.1.2.8 Language Setting..............................................................................................................................31
3.1.2.9 User Options.....................................................................................................................................31
3.1.2.10 Style of Operation .............................................................................................................................31
3.1.2.11 Configuration - Information ...............................................................................................................31
3.1.2.12 Service Functions .............................................................................................................................31
3.1.3 Specific Settings .....................................................................................................................................32
3.2 User Settings ...............................................................................................................................................32
3.2.1 User Sequences .....................................................................................................................................32
3.2.1.1 Creating New Sequence ...................................................................................................................32
3.2.1.2 Parameters of Sections in Sequence................................................................................................34

page 3 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

3.2.1.3 Saving New Sequence .....................................................................................................................34


3.2.2 User Diagnoses/Programs .....................................................................................................................35
3.2.3 Recent Therapies ...................................................................................................................................35
4 ACCESSORIES.................................................................................................................................................36
4.1 Power Supply Adapter BTL-228...................................................................................................................36
4.2 Accumulator .................................................................................................................................................37
4.3 Lithium Battery .............................................................................................................................................37
4.4 Common Accessories ..................................................................................................................................37
4.5 Accessories for Electrotherapy ....................................................................................................................38
4.6 Accessories for Ultrasound Therapy ............................................................................................................38
4.7 Accessories for laser Therapy......................................................................................................................38
5 EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE AND SAFETY ..................................................................................................39
5.1 Safety...........................................................................................................................................................40
5.2 Contraindications .........................................................................................................................................42
5.2.1 Contraindications for Electrotherapy ......................................................................................................42
5.2.2 Contraindications for Ultrasound Therapy ..............................................................................................42
5.2.3 Contraindications for Laser Therapy ......................................................................................................42
5.3 Useful addresses .........................................................................................................................................43
5.4 Warranty ......................................................................................................................................................43
6 TECHNICAL PARAMETERS ............................................................................................................................44
6.1 Technical Parameters of the BTL-4000 Series Devices...............................................................................44
6.2 Technical Parameters of Power Supply Adapter BTL-228 ...........................................................................45
6.3 Basic Parameters of Electrotherapy Generator............................................................................................46
6.4 Basic Parameters of Ultrasound Generator .................................................................................................46
6.5 Basic Parameters of Laser Generator..........................................................................................................46
6.6 Technical Parameters of Ultrasound Heads.................................................................................................47
6.7 Technical Parameters of Laser Probes ........................................................................................................47
6.8 Applicable Standards ...................................................................................................................................48
6.9 Interconnection with Other Devices..............................................................................................................49
7 CONFIGURATIONS OF DEVICES ...................................................................................................................51
7.1 Configurations of Combined Devices BTL-4000 Combi ...............................................................................51
7.2 Configurations of Electrotherapy Devices BTL-4000 Puls............................................................................51
7.3 Configurations of Ultrasound Devices BTL-4000 sono.................................................................................52
7.4 Configurations of Laser Devices BTL-4000 Laser........................................................................................52

page 4 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

1 GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
BTL-4000 Series is a series of devices designed for physiotherapy. Depending on the required configuration it has
one or two generators – for electrotherapy, ultrasound therapy and/or laser therapy. The device can be configured for
treating of one or two patients and can run up to four independent therapies. The device can be also further upgraded
– see the configuration tables of individual devices at the end of this User’s Manual.

The BTL-4000 Series devices have extensive databases of preset diagnoses and programs. If the preset diagnoses
and programs do not satisfy your needs you can modify them easily and program and save your own therapies
(programs). You can also program sequences of therapies. The user therapies and sequences can be saved in the
device's memory under the user program number and/or the user diagnosis name. Thanks to this the equipment can
be used not only for common medical practice but also for laboratory work.

The BTL-4000 Series devices detect and check the connected accessories. After each switch-on the device tests its
internal circuits and generators. During therapy it checks the status on the output – for example in case of
electrotherapy it monitors the quality of application of the electrodes to the patient’s body, in case of ultrasound it
monitors the contact between the ultrasound head and the patient’s skin – and according to this status the device
automatically adjusts the output intensity value. If contact is bad, the running therapy is automatically interrupted, data
(intensity and time) on the current channel tab start blinking and an acoustic signal is emitted.

The BTL-4000 Series devices divide into the following type groups: BTL-4000 Puls – electrotherapy devices, BTL-
4000 Sono –ultrasound therapy devices, BTL-4000 Laser – laser therapy devices, and BTL-4000 Combi, made as
combinations of the Puls, Sono and Laser models.

The BTL-4000 Series devices enable to perform combined therapy ultrasound + electrostimulation. Naturally it is
possible to choose the ultrasound head polarity (anode / cathode), in combined therapy it is also possible to utilize
interference currents.

Recommended therapies for the BTL-4000 Series devices, contraindications, additional information about therapies
and references to related literature are in the User’s Guides that are supplied together with each device.

Device BTL-4000 Puls and BTL-4000 Combi can be interconnected with the BTL vac vacuum unit, to apply
electrotherapy using its suction cup electrodes. If the pulse mode is selected on BTL vac, electrotherapy can be
further combined with simple mechanotherapy. The BTL vac device can be controlled by the BTL-4000 Series device
– suction in the vacuum electrodes is adjusted according to the intensity of the output current.

Devices BTL-4000 Puls and BTL-4000 Combi with the electro-generator can apply a wide range of currents – galvanic
current, diadynamic currents, TENS currents, interference currents, a wide range of pulses, microcurrents, even the
high-voltage therapy. For most of the currents the output mode can be selected – constant current or constant voltage
(the constant voltage mode is suitable especially for combined therapy and/or stimulation by a point electrode, or if as
a result of various circumstances the intensity in the CC mode decreases).

Devices BTL-4000 Sono and BTL-4000 Combi with the ultrasound generator work with the ultrasound heads of a size
2 2
of 1 cm or 4 cm ; the frequency of the ultrasound waves can be set to 1 MHz or 3 MHz, which influences the depth of
their penetration into the tissue. You can select either continuous or pulse mode of ultrasound waves, set the pulse
frequency or the “duty factor”.

Devices BTL-4000 Sono and BTL-4000 Combi with the laser generator work with the laser probes, which can
generate many types of laser radiation (red, infrared, divergent or convergent beam, etc.). The probe types include
probes with green supplementary lighting of the laser beam; you can select the continuous or pulse mode of the laser
and set the pulse frequency and the "duty factor".

For the latest information about BTL products and for contact to the BTL companies please refer to our website
http://www.btlnet.com.

page 5 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

2 INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

2.1 DESCRIPTION OF THE DEVICE

2.1.1 Top Panel


1-6 outputs for patient cables on the rear panel of the device, see 2.1.2 Rear Panel
7 display
8 diag button for quick selection of diagnosis
9 prog button for quick selection of therapy program
10 man button for manual setting of all therapy parameters
11 menu button (setting of date, time, language, display contrast, sounds, customizing, etc.)
12 select/intensity knob (selection and setting of individual parameters)
13 enter button (confirmation of selection or setting)
14 esc button (rejection of selection or setting and return to the previous state)
15 tab button for switching between the buttons on the display
16 button 1 for switching to the tab of the first generator
17 button 2 for switching to the tab of the second generator

page 6 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

17

10
8

16

11
9

13
14

15

12

page 7 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

2.1.2 Rear Panel

1-6 patient outputs – for exact configuration see table Tab. 2.1
18 mains switch for switching the device on/off – positions 1 / 0.
19 socket for connection of external power supply adapter BTL-228
20 warning label with parameters of power supply and input of the device

page 8 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

Tab. 2.1 Configuration of Output Connectors

Device Type output 1 output 2 output 3 output 4 output 5 output 6


BTL-4610 Puls Optimal E1opti
BTL-4615 Puls Optimal E1opti
BTL-4621 Puls Optimal E1opti
BTL-4620 Puls Optimal E2opti E1opti
BTL-4625 Puls Optimal E2opti E1opti
BTL-4110 Laser Optimal L1A L1B door acup.
BTL-4120 Laser Optimal L1A L1B door L2A
BTL-4710 Sono Optimal U1A U1B E input E output
BTL-4810 S Combi Optimal U1A U1B E1opti
BTL-4815 S Combi Optimal U1A U1B E1opti
BTL-4821 S Combi Optimal U1A U1B E1opti
BTL-4810 L Combi Optimal L1A L1B door E1opti
BTL-4815 L Combi Optimal L1A L1B door E1opti
BTL-4821 L Combi Optimal L1A L1B door E1opti
BTL-4800 SL Combi Optimal U1A U1B door L1A

BTL-4610 Puls Professional* E1


BTL-4615 Puls Professional* E1
BTL-4621 Puls Professional* E1
BTL-4620 Puls Professional E2 E1
BTL-4625 Puls Professional E2 E1
BTL-4640 Puls Professional E2 E1
BTL-4110 Laser Professional L1A L1B door acup.
BTL-4120 Laser Professional L1A L1B door L2A
BTL-4710 Sono Professional U1A U1B E input E output
BTL-4810 S Combi Professional U1A U1B E1
BTL-4815 S Combi Professional U1A U1B E1
BTL-4821 S Combi Professional U1A U1B E1
BTL-4810 L Combi Professional L1A L1B door E1
BTL-4815 L Combi Professional L1A L1B door E1
BTL-4821 L Combi Professional L1A L1B door E1
BTL-4800 SL Combi Professional U1A U1B door L1A
* can be extended by the HVT module

Legend:
E1 connector for connection of electrotherapy accessories (BTL-236-1(2), BTL vac) to the E1 generator
E2 connector for connection of electrotherapy accessories (BTL-236-1(2), BTL vac) to the E2 generator
E1opti connector for connection of electrotherapy cables (BTL-226, BTL vac) to the E1 generator
E2opti connector for connection of electrotherapy cables (BTL-226, BTL vac) to the E2 generator
L1A connector for connection of laser probe BTL-448, e.g. red, to the L1 generator
L1B connector for connection of laser probe BTL-448, e.g. infrared, to the L1 generator
L2A connector for connection of laser probe BTL-448, e.g. red, to the L2 generator
L2B connector for connection of laser probe BTL-448, e.g. infrared, to the L2 generator
2
U1A connector for connection of ultrasound head BTL-237, e.g. 1 cm , to the U1 generator
U1B connector for connection of ultrasound head BTL-237, e.g. 4 cm2, to the U1 generator
E input connector for input of external electrotherapy BTL-46xx, BTL-56xx on the ultrasound device at
combined therapy
E output connector for output of external electrotherapy BTL-46xx, BTL-56xx on the ultrasound device at
combined therapy
door connector for the open door sensor
acup. connector for the acupuncture electrode

To see how many patients and to which outputs you can simultaneously connect, press menu / accessories /
connectors - information.

page 9 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

2.1.3 Front Panel


21 display of the remaining time of therapy for the first channel
22 display of the remaining time of therapy for the second channel
23 start/stop1 button for starting/stopping of therapy on the first channel
24 start/stop2 button for starting/stopping of therapy on the second channel
25 on/off switch – serves for switching the device on/off
26 service connector under a cover and the type, manufacture and warning labels (placed on the bottom
cover of the device)

12

21 22

23 24

26
25

page 10 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

2.2 ASSEMBLY AND PUTTING INTO OPERATION

Unpack the equipment and place it on a stable horizontal surface proportioned for the equipment's weight, out of
reach of sunlight. During the operation the equipment gets warm, therefore it must not be located close to heat-
producing devices. Cooling of the equipment is provided by forced air circulation. Cooling vents are located on the
rear panel of the equipment and must not be covered. Place the equipment so that the free space behind the rear side
is at least 10 cm. Do not put the equipment on a soft surface so as not to obstruct the airflow. Do not put any heat-
producing devices on the equipment, neither objects containing water or other liquid. Do not place the equipment
close to devices producing strong electromagnetic, electric or magnetic field (diathermy, X-rays, etc.), otherwise the
equipment could be undesirably influenced. In case of any questions please contact an authorized service of BTL
devices.

The same installation conditions apply for the BTL-228 power supply adapter and must be observed.

We recommend keeping the packing of the equipment for further possible transport.

Plug the device in the mains socket by means of the BTL-228 power supply adapter (see Chapter 6 Technical
Parameters.

Plug the power supply adapter directly in the mains socket; do not use any multi-connection extension cable
or adaptor.

Check of correct mains voltage 230 V (115 V)


Before first connection of the external power supply adapter BTL-228 to the mains check if the mains voltage switch
on the adapter is in the position corresponding to the local network parameters (i.e. either in the position 230 V or in
the position 115 V). For details see 4.1 Power Supply Adapter BTL-228.
In case of any questions contact the authorized service of BTL devices.

Switching the device on:


Connect the power supply adapter to the device and plug its mains cable in the mains socket, switch the O/ I rocker
switch (18) on the rear panel to the I position and in the end press the ON/OFF switch (25) on the front panel. If the
internal functions test passes OK, the display writes the device type and the equipment is ready for operation – see
Note.

Connection of accessories
Connect the supplied accessories successively to the output connectors (1) to (6) on the rear panel of the device
according to Tab. 2.1. The unit automatically detects the accessory, determines its type and displays it in the
corresponding tab on the screen. If you happen to connect unsuitable accessory, e.g. a laser probe to the
electrotherapy generator, the screen displays a warning and information where the accessory shall be connected.

Recharging of accumulator
If the device contains internal accumulator (the Professional variant), it is sold in half-charged status. That is why we
recommend formatting of the accumulator after purchase of the device: connect the device to the mains via the
external adapter for at least 48 hours without interruption, the mains rocker switch (18) in position 1. The device will
be recharged and the accumulator will be properly formatted. The properly formatted accumulator enables longer
operation of the device without . For details see 4.2 Accumulator.

Restart of the device - reset


If for a reason (electromagnetic interference, etc.) the device stops responding to the user's commands and the
message "please wait..." with small moving squares is not displayed, the device can be put into the initial state by
simultaneous pressing of the prog (9) and menu (11) buttons. After this the device immediately gets into the initial
status as well as after switch-on of power supply.
The mains switch (18) on the rear panel has the same effect – the whole device switches off; however, we
recommend using the above described combination of keys prog + menu which is more friendly to the electronics of
the device.

Note:
After the switch-on the equipment tests its internal functions (for approx. 5 – 10 seconds) and in case of any
discrepancy it alerts to it and, if needed, locks itself in the secure state. In such case it is necessary to contact the
authorized service of BTL devices.

page 11 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

2.3 BASIC OPERATING OF THE DEVICE

The display contains several graphic elements. Some of them are only for information, some can be activated. The
basic elements are the following:
• buttons (it is possible to activate them by the tab button (15) and to change their values.) The activated
buttons are displayed inversely.
• information texts
• channel tabs (switching between the tabs, selection)

The buttons can be enabled or disabled. The disabled buttons are crossed out.

All the displayed enabled buttons can be successively activated by pressing the tab button (15). By repeated pressing
of this key further buttons on the screen are successively activated.

If the button contains one numeric value, this value can be directly changed by the select/intensity knob (12). If the
button contains more numeric values or an item selected from a list, pressing of the enter button (13) opens the
detailed subscreen of the button. To leave the subcscreen press esc (14) – all data you have changed will remain
changed.

Information texts
The text is displayed directly on the display, in a menu or in a button. If a text is too long and does not fit on the
display in full, after a while it starts scrolling automatically.

Selected channel
Although most of the devices of the BTL-4000 Series can run more therapies at a time, only one channel can be
controlled at the particular moment, That channel is called the "selected channel". The tab of the "selected channel" in
the bottom part of the screen is coloured dark. All information on the screen and all controls relate to this channel. The
most important information about the therapies on the other channels remains visible on their tabs.

channel identification: E - electrotherapy


buttons

tab of the selected channel tab of the channel which is not selected

information about connected accessories

information

tab of the channel with running therapy

disabled button

page 12 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

2.4 THERAPY (PRINCIPLE OF SETTING)

2.4.1 Therapy Setting Flowchart

OPENING
SCREEN

diag 1 2 man

SELECTION BY DIAGNÓSIS
prog esc tab enter menu
esc

SELECTION BY
PROGRAM

select

esc

enter enter

MANUAL SETTING
- SETTING OF ALL
THERAPY PARAMETERS

esc esc

start/stop
START OF THERAPY INTERRUPTION
OF THERAPY

start/stop

RUNNING
THERAPY

page 13 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

2.4.2 Opening Screen and Selection of Channels, Tabs,


Accessories
Besides the initial information, this screen contains channel tabs with description of the connected accessories. The
number of channels – tabs depends on the required configuration of the device. To display all information of the
channel press button1 (16) or 2 (17) under the tab. The information set on the "invisible channels" remain preserved.
The following scheme shows that almost the entire screen is available for the "selected channel".

Buttons 1(16) and 2(17) located directly under the tabs serve for switching between the tabs.

On the channels where more accessories can be connected to one generator (ultrasound generator and two
ultrasound heads, laser generator and laser probes), repeated pressing of the tab's button serves for switching
between these accessories.

The tab of the channel which is selected (i.e. its information is just on the display) is black.

Examples of information on the tabs:

tab of the selected E channel to which no accessory is connected

tab of the E channel which is not selected, with connected accessory BTL-236-2

tab of the U generator which is not selected, with connected


ultrasound head; pressing of buttons 1 (16) and 2 (17) under
the tab serves for switching between the connected heads – 1
2 2
cm /4 cm

tab of the selected L generator with connected laser probe;


pressing of buttons 1 (16) and 2 (17) under the tab serves for
switching between the connected probes– 685nm/830nm
(red/infrared)

tab of the selected E2 channel with unsuitable connected accessory, which this generator
cannot work with

2.4.3 Setting of Therapy Parameters by Selection of Diagnosis


– "diag" button
To view the list of diagnoses press the diag button (8). Each tab – channel – is assigned the list of diagnoses which
can be performed on this tab. For example, on the U generator tab you can find all diagnoses which can be performed
with the ultrasound heads. On the E generator tab you can find all diagnoses which can be treated by electrotherapy;

page 14 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

in addition the list can contain e.g. diagnoses for high-voltage and/or combined therapy, depending on the
configuration of the device.
For moving in the list of diagnoses use the select knob (12), the currently selected diagnosis is displayed in bold.
For fast finding of a diagnose select its initial letter by the tab button (15).
After finding of the required diagnosis select it by pressing the enter button (13). If the diagnosis is assigned more
therapies – e.g. the treatment can be done by several various types of current – the list of therapies appears after
selection of the diagnosis. Select the required therapy by the select knob (12) and press enter (13) again.

select select

enter

select

enter

The user therapies which you create yourselves are in the *user diagnoses / programs directory. Their list appears
after pressing the enter button (13).

enter

page 15 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

2.4.4 Setting of Therapy Parameters by Selection of Program


– "prog" button

After pressing the prog button (9) a screen opens where you can enter the number of the required therapy program.
The program number contains the prefix, i.e. the letter corresponding to the therapy principle: E – electrotherapy; U –
ultrasound; L – laser therapy.

Combined therapies E+U are sorted among the E programs and are on the E1 electrotherapy tab – in the following
pictures on the E1 channel. They are on positions E-35xx to E-39xx.

Your user diagnoses (except sequences) are stored under the program numbers E-80xx to E-89xx for electrotherapy,
U-80xx to U-89xx for ultrasound therapy and L-80xx to L-89xx for laser therapy.

Your user sequences are stored under the program numbers E-95xx to E-99xx for electrotherapy, U-95xx to U-99xx
for ultrasound therapy and L-95xx to L-99xx for laser therapy.

The recommended programs assigned to recommended diagnoses are in the User's Guide.

For faster setting, the program numbers are arranged into pairs. For change of the number use the select knob (12),
for switching between the pairs of digits use the tab key (15).

select

enter

2.4.5 User Setting of Therapy Parameters –"man" button

The therapy parameters screen for user (manual) setting appears after pressing the man button (10). All therapy
parameters can be set and saved as a user program or diagnosis.
It Is obvious that the therapy parameters screens of individual currents of electrotherapy, ultrasound therapy and laser
therapy differ in dependence on the options which can be set in the particular moment. For more details see the
respective User's Guide.
To open the required menu or setting dialog select the respective button by the tab key (15) and then press enter
(13). Most dialogs are accompanied with illustration pictures and symbols. See the scheme of possibilities of individual
settings in this mode.

page 16 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

enter
enter

enter

enter

enter

enter

enter

page 17 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

2.4.5.1 Therapy Parameters Screen


This screen opens after selection of therapy after pressing the diag (8), prog (9) or man (10) button, see. 2.3
Therapy Setting Flowchart. Before the start of therapy you can change all parameters.

2.4.5.2 Setting of Therapy Time


The time of therapy can be set only on the therapy parameters screen, either by activation of the time button and
pressing of the enter button (13) after which the time setting dialog opens, or by fast selection using the
select / intensity knob (12).

enter

select
Select/intensity

By pressing the start / stop1 (23) or start / stop2 (24) knob you can start or interrupt therapy – see 2.5.1 Start,
Interruption and End of Therapy.

2.4.5.3 Setting of Intensity of Therapy


Intensity (power) of ultrasound and laser therapy can be set only on the therapy parameters screen when the therapy
is not running.
In electrotherapy, where intensity is set during therapy, it can be set only by the select/intensity knob (12).

page 18 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

2.5 COURSE OF THERAPY

2.5.1 Start, Interruption and End of Therapy


To start therapy (time of therapy) on the first channel (tab) press the start / stop1 knob (23), to start therapy on the
second channel press the start / stop2 knob (24). Therapy can be started only if the display of the selected channel is
displaying the therapy parameters screen.

stopping of interrupted therapy esc

start of
START of therapy interrupted therapy
start / stop1 time / stop
therapy parameters running therapy paused therapy
screen screen screen

time/stop
start / stop1

interruption of therapy
time correction
during interruption

To restart the interrupted – paused – therapy press the start / stop1 (or start / stop2) button, to stop it press the esc
button (14).
During the pause – interrupted therapy – it is possible to modify the time setting by turning of the select / intensity
knob (12) (in laser therapy and all types of sequences it is impossible).

select/intensity
direction of increase
of intensity

Laser therapy can be also started/interrupted by pressing the start / stop button located on the laser probe.

START / STOP

page 19 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

2.5.2 Running Therapy Screen

name of the selected therapy / program and the set parameters

symbol of enabling / disabling


of the check of contact with the patient

set intensity

symbol of the generated output

time remaining until


the end of therapy

2.5.3 Electrotherapy – Setting during Therapy

2.5.3.1 Setting the Intensity in 4-Electrode Therapies


In therapies applied by four electrodes you can set different intensity values between individual pairs of electrodes.
For example, in case of 4-pole interference the output intensity is set by the select/intensity knob (12) either common
for both channels (the 1+2 button is active) or separately for one of the channels – the 1 or 2 screen button is active.
For switching among the buttons use the tab key (13).
intensity intensity

If the zero intensity is set on a channel, the therapy is stopped.

2.5.3.2 Manual Turning of Vector in Dipole Interference


In manually-controlled dipole interference, the dipole angle in the intersection of the electrodes is set during therapy
by the enter knob (13) for turning to the right, and by the esc knob (14) for turning to the left. The position of the
dipole is symbolized on the screen above the time value.

page 20 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

When you are rotating the dipole, the device automatically switches to the diagnostic – "measuring" mode
(Spectrum = 0 Hz) and after setting after approximately 1 - 2 seconds it gradually returns to the therapy mode – (the
Spectrum value corresponds to the set value).

2.5.4 Accessories –Signalling of Operation


Accessories BTL-236 (for electrotherapy) and BTL-237 (ultrasound heads) feature blue pilot lights that signal their
operating status:

BTL-236-1: patient cable with two electrodes – blue and yellow pilot light:
• blinks slow – accessories ready for therapy – therapy settings screen displayed
• shines permanently – the device is generating, dangerous voltage may be on the electrodes

BTL-236-2: patient cable with four electrodes – blue and yellow pilot light:
• blinks slow – accessories ready for therapy – therapy settings screen displayed; always the pilot
light at the selected pair of electrodes A or B is blinking
• blinks in the rhythm of the generated currents or shines permanently – the device is
generating, dangerous voltage may be on the pair of electrodes A or B at which the pilot light is
shining

BTL-237: ultrasound head 1 cm2 or 4 cm2 – blue pilot on the head:


• blinks slow – accessories ready for therapy – therapy settings screen displayed
• shines permanently – the device is generating
• blinks fast – the head does not have contact with the patient during generating, the therapy is
automatically interrupted and the device waits for reestablishment of the contact

BTL-448: laser probes 635 nm and 830 nm – green pilot light and focusing beam:
• blinks in the rhythm of the generated laser or shines – the device is generating laser radiation,
during generation the device indicates occurrence of laser radiation by acoustic signal

BTL vac: vacuum unit for electrotherapy – see the BTL vac User's Manual

For detailed information please refer to the leaflet which is enclosed to each accessory supplied.

Note:
The tab always displays only a text symbol (description) with no picture.

2.5.5 Indication of Operation – Energy on Output

2.5.5.1 Electrotherapy
Possible occurrence of electric voltage on the output is indicated:
• on the screen – by the value of intensity of the output current
• on the screen – by an animated icon of running current
• on the channel tab – by the value of intensity or running time
• on the electrotherapy accessory BTL-236 – by the blue and yellow
pilot light – for details see Chapter 2.5.4 Accessories –Signalling
of Operation

Disconnection of electric circuit – e.g. in case of bad contact between the electrode and the patient's body – is
indicated by blinking of the information about intensity and time on the respective electro-generator tab. This status
may be also indicated by a sound signal.
The function of monitoring of contact with the patient may be disabled in the menu of the device.
Enabling/disabling of this function is indicated by the figure symbol (crossed-out if disabled).

Note:
Some types of the generated currents do not allow monitoring of the contact with the patient. In such cases the
crossed-out figure is displayed, regardless of the user setting of detection.

page 21 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

2.5.5.2 Ultrasound Therapy


The possibility of generation of ultrasound field by the BTL-237 head is
indicated:
• on the screen – by the intensity value
• on the screen – by the contact value (bar-graph)
• on the channel tab – by the running time value
• on ultrasound accessory BTL-237 – by the blue pilot light – for
details see Chapter 2.5.4 Accessories –Signalling of
Operation

Bad contact between the head and the patient's body is indicated by fast blinking of the blue pilot lights on the head
and blinking of information about intensity and time on the corresponding ultrasound generator tab.
This function is indicated by a figure symbol on the screen.

2.5.5.3 Laser Therapy


The possibility of generation of laser radiation by the BTL-448 probe is
indicated:
• on the screen – by the value of power
• by an acoustic signal (which cannot be disabled, as required by
the applicable standard)
• by the green indication pilot light on the laser probe
• by the green or red focusing beam
• by the signal icon on the screen
• by the running time value on the channel tab

2.6 THERAPY PARAMETERS

Parameters in individual therapies vary. For each therapy only those parameters are displayed which describe the
therapy and which can be set in the manual mode after pressing the man button (10). For detailed description of
parameters of individual therapies refer to the respective User's Guide.

page 22 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

2.7 ENCYCLOPAEDIA

The encyclopaedia provides information about possible therapies. The hard copy (paper or CD) is always supplied
together with the equipment, its electronic version in the device is available from the menu: menu / encyclopaedia.

After opening of the encyclopaedia you get to its contents – the list of diagnoses. For browsing in the list use the
select/intensity knob (12). After selection of the required diagnosis press the enter button (13) to get the specific
information about the diagnosis:

information on diagnosis

select

browsing in the information,


if it does not fit in
one screen

browsing in diagnoses

loading of parameters
of the selected diagnosis
to the parameters screen
- the device is ready for therapy

2.8 THERAPY SAVING

After pressing the save button on the screen, the user can save the particular therapy setting under a name of
diagnosis and number of program.

Therapy can be saved always after setting of the therapy parameters – i.e. from the therapy parameters screen. The
following information is saved with each therapy:
electrotherapy:
• all parameters of currents (e.g. pulse length, pause length, modulation, etc.)
• therapy time
• polarity
• output mode (constant current / constant voltage)
ultrasound therapy:
• all therapy parameters (e.g. ultrasound frequency, duty factor, pulse frequency, etc.)
• therapy time
• intensity
combined therapy electro + ultrasound:
• all parameters of electrotherapy (e.g. pulse length, pause length, modulation, etc.)
• all parameters of ultrasound therapy (e.g. ultrasound frequency, duty factor, pulse frequency, etc.)
• therapy time
• electro output polarity
• electro output mode (constant current / constant voltage)
• ultrasound intensity
laser therapy:
• all therapy parameters (frequency, course of signal...)
• irradiated area
• dose

page 23 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

When saving therapy, enter the following:


• name of diagnosis (therapy) – will be displayed in the list of diagnoses under the diag button (8)
• number of program – will be displayed in the list of diagnoses under the prog button (9)

The number of the saved program falls within the interval from 8000 to 8999. The device suggests the lowest
available number and adds the letter of the corresponding generator. So the resulting number is for example: E-8001
for electrotherapy or combined therapy, U-8526 for ultrasound therapy and L-8002 for laser therapy.

Setting of therapy parameters and saving of therapy

enter

Entering name Entering number

of diagnosis of program

enter

page 24 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

The saved therapy can be found in the following lists on the corresponding channel:

List of diagnoses

enter

List of programs

page 25 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

2.9 INTERCONNECTION OF DEVICES

2.9.1 Interconnection of BTL-4000 Puls (Combi) and BTL vac


Interconnection of electrotherapy device BTL-4000 Puls (or the electrotherapy part of BTL-4000 Combi) with the
vacuum unit BTL vac provides many benefits. Performing electrotherapy by means of the electrodes of the BTL vac
vacuum unit upgrades electrotherapy by massage programs and provides optimum contact of electrodes with the
patient's body.
The outputs of one or two channels of the electrotherapy device are interconnected with the vacuum unit to which
vacuum as well as classic electrodes are connected. To switch between them press vacuum 1 or vacuum 2 on the
front panel of BTL vac. If the vacuum unit is off the classic electrodes can be left on it because the output of BTL vac
in the OFF status is switched to the classic electrodes.

BTL-4000
Puls (Combi)

BTL vac

(the pictures are only an illustration, for real interconnection follow Tab. 2.1 Configuration of Output Connectors)

For interconnection use the interface cables leading from BTL-4000 Puls outputs E1, E2 (or E1opti, E2opti) and
connected to BTL vac inputs IN1 and IN2. For more information see the User's Guide of BTL vac.

2.9.2 Interconnection of BTL-4000 Puls and BTL-4000 Sono


If you want to perform combined therapy with these devices, you have to interconnect them mutually – e.g. according
to the following table.

Electrotherapy BTL-46xx Puls or BTL-56xx Puls Ultrasound BTL-4710 Sono or BTL-5710 Sono

Connector Connected accessories Connector Connected accessories

E1 interface cable to ultrasound U1A ultrasound head 1 cm2

E2* electrodes E2* U1B ultrasound head 4 cm2

E input interface cable to electrotherapy

* if installed E output electrodes E1

page 26 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

Setting of polarity between the ultrasound head and the electrode


After interconnection with the electrotherapy device, the ultrasound head becomes the anode (+). The other pole is
cathode (-) which is the electrode with black banana plug. If you require that the ultrasound head is the cathode (-) at
the combined therapy, set the "negative polarity" in the therapy parameters of the electrotherapy.

ATTENTION

In the case of accesories „1>>2“ is connected to the electrotherapy device the ultrasound head becomes the anode
(+). The catode (-) is connected thru black bannana plug.with minus sing “-„ on it.

In the case of accesories „1>>4“ is connected to the electrotherapy device the ultrasound head becomes the anode
(+). The catode (-) is connected thru red bannana plug.with minus sing “+„ on it, independet of selected output A or
B.

If you want to apply only electrotherapy with such interconnected devices, it makes no problem. Uncheck the option
"with electro" on the BTL-4000 Sono device, and the electrotherapy electrodes are automatically connected to the
electrotherapy output. Connectors E input and E output are interconnected inside the ultrasound device even if the
BTL-4000 Sono device is off.

2.9.3 Interconnection of BTL-4000 Puls, BTL-4000 Sono and BTL


vac
If you want to perform combined therapy with these devices, you have to interconnect them mutually – e.g. according
to the following picture and table.

BTL-4000 BTL-4000
Puls Sono

BTL vac

(the pictures are only an illustration, for real interconnection follow the below-stated table as well as
Tab. 2.1 Configuration of Output Connectors)

Electrotherapy BTL-46xx Puls or BTL-56xx Puls Ultrasound BTL-4710 Sono or BTL-5710 Sono

Connector Connected accessories Connector Connected accessories

E1 interface cable to ultrasound U1A ultrasound head 1 cm2

E2* interface cable to BTL vac (IN2) U1B ultrasound head 4 cm2

E input interface cable to electrotherapy

page 27 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

* if installed E output interface cable to BTL vac (IN1)

2.9.4 Setting and Running of Combined Therapy on Single Devices


After correct interconnection of the devices diagnoses or programs of the combined therapy shall be selected,
separately on the electrotherapy and the ultrasound devices. On the electrotherapy device set the CV mode. Then
it is necessary to attach the respective electrode to the patient to close the electric circuit ultrasound head–patient–
electrode (see the schemes above). Now it is possible to run the ultrasound by its start / stop button and after
achieving the head's contact the ultrasound starts counting time down. Now slowly increase intensity of electrotherapy
by turning the select/intensity knob to the right (in the "+" direction): the combine therapy is running. If the contact
between the ultrasound head and the treated tissue during the therapy was not continuous, the times on both devices
may differ, because time countdown on the ultrasound device is not running when contact is interrupted.

2.9.5 End of Combined Therapy on Single Devices


The combined therapy standardly ends after expiration of the set time on both devices. If for any reason you want to
end or interrupt therapy before the set time expires, first interrupt therapy on both devices by pressing the start / stop
buttons.

page 28 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

3 "MENU" BUTTON

After pressing the menu button (11) you can browse through the following menus using the select/intensity knob:
• menu
• user settings

3.1 MENU

After selection of menu and pressing enter the following menu appears:

• accessories
• encyclopaedia – see Chapter 2.7 Encyclopaedia
• unit settings
• specific settings

3.1.1 Accessories
In this submenu you can:

• select accessories installation


• display information about connected accessories
• display information about number of patients and arrangement of connectors on the rear side of the device

3.1.1.1 Accessories Installation


Every connectible accessory contains a memory which stores identification data of the accessory. Each connected
accessory has the memory that includes identification data of this accessory. On the basis of these data the device
recognizes which accessory is connected and if it is compatible and decides how it will work with the accessory. The
memory also contains the unique serial number of the accessory.
Since the accessory memory contains quite a lot of information and their upload lasts approximately from 30 second
to 2 minutes, accessories installation is intended fore quickening of the work with the device. When installation is
performed, only the serial number is read from the accessory during normal operation and the rest of the information
is read from the memory of the device.
During the installation process follow the instructions on the screen, in particular the following:
• leave the therapies on all generators off during installation
• do not leave other accessories connected than the one that is being installed. Make sure the installed
accessory is connected directly, not via interface cable and the BTL vac or BTL-4000 Sono devices.
Observing of the above principles is necessary for reduction of electromagnetic interference that could cause
improper reading of the memory data.

3.1.1.2 Information on Accessories


In this menu item you can view information about the connected accessories, i.e. its name, serial number, etc., and
particularly which generator – output / input – the accessory is designed for.

page 29 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

3.1.1.3 Connectors - Information


This menu item will inform you about the way of connection of the connectors on the rear panel of the device and to
how many patients you can connect the device safely.

3.1.2 Unit Settings


This submenu enables to set and display the following parameters:
• access password
• sounds of the device
• auto-power off
• setting of display contrast
• setting of contrast of small (digital) 99 display
• setting of display backlighting
• date and time
• language
• user options
• way of operation
• unit information
• service functions

3.1.2.1 Password Setting


This menu enables to change the password which is required by the device after switch-on. Without entering of this
password the device does not allow any further work. The devices are standardly supplied "unlocked", i.e. with
password disabled. However, in the devices which have a built-in laser generator, i.e. BTL-4000 Laser, BTL-48xx L,
BTL-48xx xL, the password cannot be disabled (as required by the respective standard) and its default value is
"0000".

Note:
If you happen to forget the password, you can always use the universal one: "00000000"

3.1.2.2 Sound Setting


Sound signalling of pressing of a button etc. and performance of some processes (start of therapy, interruption of
therapy, end of therapy, etc.). The factory-set standard sounds are sounds of therapy processes. You can set
another sound scheme or switch the sounds completely off (sound scheme 0).
In the devices with a built-in laser generator, i.e. BTL-4000 Laser, BTL-48xx L, BTL-48xx xL, the sound of running
therapy cannot be switched off (as required by the respective standard).

3.1.2.3 Auto Switch Off


Here you can set the time after which the display will be switched off, and the idle time after which to switch off the
entire device.

page 30 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

3.1.2.4 Setting of Display Contrast


After selection of this menu you can set the optimum contrast (readability) of the display by the select/intensity knob
(12).

Since the display contrast depends on many factors (e.g. temperature of the display), there is also another fast and
direct way of setting the contrast. Press simultaneously the enter (13) and esc (14) buttons and set the contrast by
the select/intensity knob (12) (when holding the two buttons enter and esc pressed).

3.1.2.5 Setting Contrast for Small Display


After selection of this menu you can set the optimum contrast (readability) of the lower digital display on the front
panel by the select/intensity knob (12).

3.1.2.6 Setting Backlight


In this item you can select by the select/intensity knob (12) whether the main display shall be backlighted
permanently, shall not be backlighted at all or shall be backlighted only if the device is connected to the mains. This
setting has strong influence on the time for which the device can be supplied from the accumulators* without
recharging. The switched-on backlighting is considerable load for the accumulators* and reduce the time of operation
without recharging.
*) refers only to the devices of the Professional series

3.1.2.7 Date and Time Setting


This item enables to set date and time in the device.

3.1.2.8 Language Setting


Selection of the language of the texts on the display of the device. The defaultly set language is english.

3.1.2.9 User Options


In older devices the enter and esc buttons were arranged the other way round; in this item you can select the new
arrangement (enter on the right, esc on the left) or the old arrangement (enter on the left, esc on the right).

3.1.2.10 Style of Operation


Here you can select whether the set time and intensity values on the display after the end of therapy shall be zero or
equal to the values of the last performed therapy.

3.1.2.11 Configuration - Information


This item displays some important information about the device, such as serial number, firmware version, etc. It is
important especially at communication with the service department.

3.1.2.12 Service Functions

3.1.2.12.1 Repair of Files


This function checks the file system in the device – the system of stored information – and fixes possible errors, i.e. for
example deletes the files which no link refers to anymore, etc. This function is recommended for use in case of lack of
memory when the device rejects to save data, or if you think that some user data have been lost, etc.

3.1.2.12.2 File System Formatting


If the repair of files function did not help, use this one. Unfortunately, formatting is accompanied with loss of all user
data and user settings of the device.

3.1.2.12.3 Delete Accessories


This function deletes all installed accessories – use it if an accessory is installed improperly – e.g. a bad "scattered"
picture on the tab, the connected accessory is not detected (the question mark is displayed constantly), etc.

3.1.2.12.4 Default Setting


This function restores all functions of the device as set in the factory. User data – patients, therapies etc. remain
preserved.

page 31 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

3.1.2.12.5 Restart of All Geners


This function switches all generators in the device off and on, to get them into the initial status such as at starting of
the device. Therapy possibly running on a generator (tab) is stopped. This function should be used only in cases when
e.g. by electromagnetic interference a generator switches off and its activity cannot be restored without switching the
whole device on and off. This function enables to initialize generators without the need of restarting the whole unit.

3.1.2.12.6 Information about Free Space on Disks


This item displays the current free space in the memory that can be used for user data.. User data are for example
patients, saved user diagnoses, I/t curves, etc..
The user can use memory marked "E:"; memory marked "S:" is intended for internal use.

3.1.3 Specific Settings


These settings are different for each generator type, for details see the User's Guide.

3.2 USER SETTINGS

After selection of menu / user settings there appears a menu with items referring to data saved by the user or to
some "extra" features of the selected generator:
• user sequence
• user diagnoses / programs
• recent therapies
• motor point detection*
• accommodation coefficient*
• I/t curve*

*only in the electro-generator and only if the device is equipped with electrodiagnostics – for details see the User's
Guide for Electrotherapy

3.2.1 User Sequences


This item enables to work with the list of sequences of programs created by the user. The selected sequence can be
run, edited and deleted in this menu. A new sequence can be created in the therapy parameters screen in the manual
settings.

3.2.1.1 Creating New Sequence


Limitation of choice of currents in one sequence when there is set no pause between sections:

If the "pause " option is set (meaning "pause between sections"), the unit stops generation after each current and the
intensity of the next current has to be set manually. In this case the currents can be sequenced without a limitation
and the user can select and combine any current in one sequence. We suggest to set this option for electrotherapy
sequences.
If the pause between sections is not set, the device continues generating all currents with the same intensity. Be
careful when setting the sequences. Each current is perceived differently by the patient. Whereas in case of TENS the
patient tolerates intensity of about 100 mA, the maximum tolerated intensity in case of diadynamic currents may be 10
times lower. Combine in one sequence only currents that are perceived by the patient in a similar way – such as
currents with the same pulse length and the maximum difference in frequency 1:10. Monophasic, symmetric and
alternating currents should not be mutually combined.

In the mode without pause between sections we therefore recommend creation of sequences containing only the
following combinations:
• diadynamic currents

page 32 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

• monophasic pulses of the same length with the DC component (differing in frequency or modulation)
• symmetric pulses of the same length with zero DC component (differing in frequency or modulation)
• alternating pulses of the same length with zero DC component (differing in frequency or modulation)
• mid-frequency bipolar currents (differing in frequency or modulation)
• interference
• TENS (differing in frequency or modulation)
• ultrasound therapies
• laser therapies

In the therapy parameters screen in the manual mode it is possible to select sequence, ultrasound sequence or
laser sequence in the therapy parameter. Creation of a new sequence is displayed in the following picture.

select

Repeat the process to insert additional


program (section) in the sequence

page 33 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

3.2.1.2 Parameters of Sections in Sequence


Since sequence is a series of individual current programs one after another, it is obvious that parameters of individual
sections must be set when creating the programs.
Each program includes several basic therapy parameters such as frequency, pulse length, modulation etc. Set all
these data in the manual setting screen and save the set therapy parameters as a user program (diagnosis). Then
include this user program in the sequence. When inserting a section in the sequence set the time of the section
(except for laser where the time of section depends on the currently connected laser probe). The programs predefined
by the manufacturer can be naturally also included in the sequences. In the sequence only polarity can be set for the
section (refers to electrotherapy sequence). The other parameters must be specified and saved in the included
program.

Example: you want to create a sequence of diadynamic DF current (without base, positive polarity, CC mode, time of
stimulation: 1 minute) and CP-ISO current (base 10 %, reversal of polarity in the middle of the set time, CC mode, 10
minutes). Press man to select the manual mode, set diadynamic currents, DF type, without base, positive polarity, CC
mode. Save this setting as a program (for example) E-8001. Then set parameters of the CP-ISO current: base 10 %,
positive, reversal, CC mode, and save it as (for example) program E-8002. Then select therapy: sequence, press
new seq., press new, set the program number 8001, set the time of section 1:00, set positive polarity and press
esc or enter. Then add the second section in the same way – new, program number 8002, time of section 10:00,
positive polarity with reversal, esc or enter. Using the tab button select the save button and press enter to save
the sequence (for example as the number 9501). The cv/cc mode is set globally for the whole sequence before
starting it.

3.2.1.3 Saving New Sequence


The sequence created as described in point 3.2.1.1 can be saved in the following ways.

Either directly from the screen for setting of new sections.

Or from the main manual screen in the same way as the new diagnosis.

User sequences are saved under numbers 9500 - 9999. They can be found under these numbers in the list of
programs, under their names in the list of diagnoses and in the list of sequences.

page 34 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

3.2.2 User Diagnoses/Programs


This item enable to run user therapies, edit their parameters, names and descriptions, delete and sort them using the
buttons on the screen and menus after pressing. The work with the user diagnoses / programs is similar to creation of
new diagnosis / program – see Chapter 2.8 Therapy Saving. On each generator tab you can see only the therapies
which were created on and belong to the tab.
The icon next to the therapy indicates which generator the therapy belongs to.

3.2.3 Recent Therapies


In this item you can select one of the recently performed therapies on the selected tab and after pressing the load
button start it again or view its parameters.

page 35 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

4 ACCESSORIES
The equipment is not designed for use in connection with other medical devices than those stated in this Manual.
In the following chapters these lists contain all accessories which can be supplied together with the devices.
For detailed information about individual accessories see the enclosed leaflets and/or the respective User's Guide.

4.1 POWER SUPPLY ADAPTER BTL-228

The devices of the BTL-4000 series can be connected to the mains exclusively via the supplied power supply adapter
BTL-228. It is forbidden to connect another adapter than BTL-228 to the device.

ventilation holes

mains voltage switch 115V/230V

supply connector for BTL-4000 mains supply 230V/ 115V

type and information label of the adapter

Switching the adapter to other mains voltage


The mains voltage switch is located on the top cover of the adapter. Before switching it is necessary to unplug the
mains supply from the socket and disconnect the supply connector from the BTL-4000 device. Turn the switch by a
fitting screwdriver or coin so that the lettering next to the switch, to which the slider of the switch is closer, corresponds
to the local mains voltage.
This action may only be done by a person acquainted with this procedure! In case of questions contact the authorized
BTL service department. The manufacturer takes no responsibility for damages caused by incorrect switching.

Replacement of fuse
The adapter contains secondary tube fuse. The types of the fuse are specified on the label of the adapter. To replace
the fuses follow the instructions below.
Before replacement of the fuse make sure that the power supply of the adapter is disconnected from the mains.
Unplug the power supply connector from the BTL-4000 device. Turn the segment of the fuse box to the left by a fitting
screwdriver or coin and take the fuse out. Insert new fuse(s) and turn the box to the right. It is forbidden to insert a
fuse with other indication than stated near the fuse box.
This action may only be done by a person acquainted with this procedure!

page 36 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

4.2 ACCUMULATOR

Devices of the Professional series have a built-in accumulator. Its type is specified in Chapter 6 Technical
Parameters. Replacement of the accumulator is provided by the authorized service of BTL devices.

During operation the accumulator is continuously being recharged from the mains. Its recharging and keeping charged
is running even if the equipment is switched off and connected to mains and the mains switch (18) on the rear panel
is in position I. At switching off, the device checks the status of the accumulators and if it finds them low, it switches to
the charging mode; in the charging mode the display is dark and the main display shows the symbol of recharging
battery. After recharging of the accumulator the device automatically switches off completely. Note that the charging
process runs only if the device is plugged in the mains and the rocker mains switch (18) on the rear panel is in
position I.

Determination of the accumulator status may take some time, therefore the device may respond with a delay after
switching off and then on again.

If the device is supplied from the mains, this status is signalled by the plug picture.

For full charging of the accumulator let it recharge for approximately 6 hours – preferably overnight. The charged
accumulator is signalled by the "full battery" picture.

Low accumulator is signalled in two levels of signalling.


• the accumulator is low, but it is still possible to work with the device for a short time, therapy cannot be
started, the running therapy will be finished – the battery picture on the display is blinking

• the accumulator is dead, the device switches off automatically

Recharging of the accumulator is signalled by the picture of recharging battery on the display.

To ensure long lifetime of the accumulator we recommend keeping it permanently charged. When it is possible,
connect the device to the mains via the adapter and switch the mains switch (18) to position I. The indication of
recharging is displayed, after recharging it goes out and the accumulator will be automatically kept charged.

If the device is left unplugged from the mains for a longer time (even in the OFF status), the accumulators gradually
spontaneously discharge. This effect is characteristic of the accumulators and cannot be removed; therefore, if the
device has been off and unplugged for a longer time than approximately 2-3 months, we recommend recharging it,
preferably for 48 hours without interruption.
For the same reason we recommend charging the device continuously for at least 48 hours immediately after
purchase, regardless of the accumulator status indication (you can work with the device normally, only do not unplug it
from the adapter, the accumulator recharges even during standard operation of the device). Thus the accumulator
gets so –called formatted and will keep working longer without recharging.

4.3 LITHIUM BATTERY

The device contains a lithium battery for backupping of date and time. The type of the battery is stated in Chapter 6
Technical Parameters. Its possible replacement is provided by the authorized service of BTL devices..

4.4 COMMON ACCESSORIES

external power supply adapter BTL-228 including the mains cable


User's Guide
markers for identification of cables - outputs
cart

page 37 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

4.5 ACCESSORIES FOR ELECTROTHERAPY

User’s Guide for electrotherapy


patient cable BTL-236-1
patient cable BTL-236-2
patient cables for BTL-4000 Series Opti, type BTL 226
2
rubber electrodes 4 x 5 cm
rubber electrodes 5 x 7 cm2
rubber electrodes 5 x 12 cm2
sponge covers for electrodes 4 x 5 cm2
sponge covers for electrodes 5 x 7 cm2
2
sponge covers for electrodes 5 x 12 cm
set of fixation belts
point electrode P5600.013
point electrode attachment – diameter 2 mm P5600.014
point electrode attachment – diameter 6 mm P5600.015
HVT attachment – P5600.017
self-adhesive electrodes
vaginal electrode P5600.010
rectal electrode P5600.011
interface cable between BTL-5000/4000 Series and BTL vac, type PVAC.056
interconnection cable between BTL-4000 Series Opti and BTL vac, type PVAC.056

4.6 ACCESSORIES FOR ULTRASOUND THERAPY

User’s Guide for ultrasound therapy


ultrasound head BTL-237, area 1 cm2
ultrasound head BTL-237, area 4 cm2
ultrasound gel 235 ml, 5 l, 10 l
interface cable between BTL-56xx Puls, BTL-57xx Sono, type PVAC.056
interface cable between BTL-46xx Puls a BTL-47xx Sono, type PVAC.056

4.7 ACCESSORIES FOR LASER THERAPY

User’s Guide for laser therapy


red laser probes BTL-448
infrared laser probes BTL-448
optical attachments for laser probes
warning label "Laser Workplace"
protective goggles OPTE BS 2, L3, 630 – 1350 nm

page 38 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

5 EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE AND SAFETY


The service inspection including measuring of all parameters of the device and possible recalibration must be
performed in intervals shorter than 30 months. The inspection is performed by the BTL service department on the
basis of the user's order. If the inspection is not done in the stated term the manufacturer does not guarantee the
technical parameters and safe operation of the product.

Keep the device clean, do not store or use it for a long time in enormously dusty environment and do not sink it in any
liquid. Before each use check if the equipment and its accessories (especially cables) are not mechanically or
otherwise damaged. Do not use the equipment if it is damaged!

The measuring system of the laser device does not require (and does not even enable) any user settings or
adjustment. Its inspection is performed at regular recalibration of the device by the authorized service of BTL devices.

Backward measuring of the laser output power does not require (and does not even enable) any user settings or
adjustment. Calibration is performed at regular recalibration of the device by the authorized service of BTL devices.

Cleaning of the equipment's surface and of its parts:


For cleaning of the equipment and its parts use only a soft cloth slightly moistened by water or by 2 % solution of
detergent. Do not use agents containing alcohol, ammonia, benzine, thinners, etc.
For cleaning of the equipment do not use abrasive materials, otherwise the surface of its parts could be damaged
(e.g. the metal part of the ultrasound head).

No part of the equipment needs to be aseptic or sterilized.

Cleaning of accessories which come into contact with the patient (e.g. electrodes, ultrasound heads, laser probes and
attachments):
We recommend cleaning of these parts after treating of each patient. For cleaning use agents approved by the
competent health officer, e.g. Sekusept, Bacilol etc., for cables of accessories use e.g. Incidur spray etc.
After each application of the divergent probe wipe the head of the probe by a cotton cloth to keep the lens clean.
Convergent probes: unscrew the head, wipe the lens and blow the head through by compressed air.

Cleaning of accessories which come into contact with the patient – laser optical attachments:
The optical waveguides (attachments) can be sterilized for 10 minutes at the temperature of 120°C.

Replacement of fuse
The protective fuse is located inside the BTL-4000 device. The type of the fuse is specified in Chapter 6 Technical
Parameters The user may not be replace the fuse; for replacement of the fuse always contact the authorized service
of BTL devices.

Transport and Storage


We recommend keeping the packing of the equipment. For transport it is suitable to pack the equipment in this
packing which ensures its maximum protection. Unplug the power supply adapter and the cables of accessories.
Avoid big shocks. The equipment shall be stored / transported only under conditions defined in Chapter 6 Technical
Parameters

page 39 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

5.1 SAFETY

ATTENTION!

The consumed current or voltage at the connectors marked by the above label can exceed the secure values.
The device is equipped with a system of protection against connection of other accessories than supplied from the
manufacturer, so, it cannot work with accessories produced by other manufacturers.

The protection of the equipment is BF-type floating applied part (only if original accessories including power supply
adapter BTL-228 are used).

The equipment does not use any medicaments which would be its integral part or would be applied by means of it.

Safety Precautions - General:

• Before first switch-on of the equipment read carefully the User's Manual.
• All staff to use the equipment must be instructed of the way of operation, maintenance and checking of the
equipment and of the safety principles.
• The electrical cabling which the equipment will be connected to must be installed and tested according to the
existing valid standards (IEC 364). If you are not sure that the mains are completely OK get them inspected by
an inspection engineer.
• Check if the parameters of the mains correspond to the requirements of the equipment according to Chapter 6
Technical Parameters. It must not be used in the environment which implies the danger of explosion or
penetration of water into the equipment. It must not be used in connection with flammable anaesthetics or
oxidizing gasses (O2, N2O, etc.).
• Do not place the equipment within the reach of direct sunshine and strong electromagnetic fields so as to
prevent undesirable mutual influence. In case that this undesirable influence occurs put the equipment more
distant from the source of interference or contact the authorized service of BTL devices.
• Inspect the equipment thoroughly before each use (loose cables, broken insulation of cables, functions of
displays and controls, etc.); in case of any inconsistency stop using the equipment and contact the authorized
BTL service department. If the equipment's behaviour differs from the function described in this Manual stop
using the equipment and contact the BTL service department.
• If the equipment shows any defect or if you have doubts about its correct function, terminate therapy
immediately. If you do not determine the source of uncertainty after thorough study of the Manual, contact the
BTL service department. If the equipment is used out of accord with this Manual or is used even if it shows
functional differences from this Manual, the user is responsible for the damages caused by the equipment.
• Do not dismantle the equipment in any case, removal of protective covers implies the danger of electrical injury.
Possible replacement of the lithium battery, fuses or accumulators may only be done by the authorized BTL
service department.
• All material and parts which come into direct contact with the patient's body (as well as for example agents for
cleaning of electrodes) must comply with the respective standards related to irritability, allergization, toxicity,
genotoxicity, carcinogeneity (ISO 10993-1, ISO 10993-3, ISO 10993-5). The user is responsible for all these
materials and parts if not supplied by the BTL equipment supplier.
• The connectors for accessories as well as the other connectors must not be used for connection of anything else
than they are designed for, otherwise there is a danger of electrical injury and serious damage to the equipment.
• The equipment does not use or produce any toxic substances during its operation, storage or transport under the
stated conditions.
• After bringing the equipment from cold environment to the warmth do not plug it in the mains until the
temperatures become equal (i.e. for at least 1 hour).
• Before start of therapy check if all set parameters correspond to your intents.
• Do not apply therapy on damaged skin!
• To terminate the application do not switch off the mains switch but press the start / stop knob (18). The time
interval between switching the mains switch on and off must be at least 3 seconds.
• If after many years of operation it is necessary to discard the equipment, it can be done in a way which is usual
for this type of devices after removal of the lithium battery and the leaden accumulator (for the Professional
variant). The removed batteries shall be disposed of in the way designated for hazardous waste - not within the

page 40 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

municipal waste. The equipment does not contain any toxic materials which could harm the environment in case
of normal way of liquidation.
• The equipment and the accessories must not be used in a way out of accord with this User's Manual.
• During work with this device use the recommended protective equipment.
• Keep the equipment out of reach of children.
• The equipment does not contain any components which could be repaired by the user. Do not remove any
covers from the equipment. All repairs should be done by the authorized BTL service department.
• Don’t connect equipment to patient when equipment is still connected to computer (via service connector)

Safety Precautions – Electrotherapy:

• When applying DC currents (the polarity button is enabled) it is necessary to pay attention to the set intensity
and time of application of currents. Wrong values can cause burning of the patient's skin.
• The maximum secure effective value of current density on the electrodes is 2 mA/cm2 (according to IEC 601-2-
10) and can be extended only when electrodes smaller than 70 cm2 are used. In such case it is necessary to pay
higher attention to application of currents! Wrong values can cause burning of the patient's skin.
• Application of electrodes near the thorax may increase the risk of cardiac fibrillation.
• For contraindications see Chapter 5.2 Contraindications. Use of electrotherapy in the cases of contraindication
must be approved by a specialist.
• Simultaneous connection of the patient to a high-frequency surgical device may cause burning in the place of the
electrodes and possible damage to the electrotherapy device.
• Simultaneous connection of the patient to an ECG monitor or an ECG alarm system may cause temporary
malfunction of the ECG systems or unreliability of the values measured by the ECG systems.
• Operation of the equipment close to (within 1 m) a short-wave or micro-wave therapeutic device may cause
instability of the equipment's output.
• All supplied electrodes can be used for maximum intensity of currents and voltage that can be set on the device.

Safety Precautions – Ultrasound:

• Protect the heads consistently from shocks and frost. Do not uselessly bend the mains cable.
• During therapy hold the head so that you do not touch its metallic parts.
• An impact on the metal part of the head as well as an intense impact on the head's case may negatively change
the parameters of the therapeutic head.
• For contraindications see Chapter 5.2 Contraindications. Use of ultrasound therapy in the cases of
contraindication must be approved by a specialist.
• For therapy use only the BTL ultrasound gel; the head is not tested for other gels or oils and their use could
damage the head. If you still want to use other gels, we recommend them to be only water-based gels. Never
use paraffin-based gels.

Safety Precautions – Laser:

• Mark the laser workplace by respective warning notices and connect the door switch.
• Equip the laser workplace with an operating code which must be approved by the competent health officer.
• When using a laser probe with an output of 200 mW or more (300 mW, 400 mW) and if the laser power is set
higher than 150 mW, the duration of therapy must not exceed 15 min.
• Attention – use of any other than the stated control and setting elements and processes may cause dangerous
exposition to radiation.
• The equipment works with laser beam of the 3B class . When working with the beam follow all instructions stated
in this Manual and in the laser therapy User's Guide. Prevent the laser beam from hitting eyes, thyroid and other
endocrine glands, head, etc. (see the User's Guide). Both the therapist and the patient have to wear the supplied
protective goggles during therapy. Incorrect handling of the equipment (out of accord with this Manual) may
cause danger radiation and even damage to eyes! In such a case the user is responsible for all damages.
• During radiation do not disconnect the probe from the equipment and do not switch the equipment off.
• Protect the laser probe consistently from impacts !!!! The probe is not waterproof!
• Protect yourself and your neighbourhood from being directly hit by the laser beam.
• For contraindications see Chapter 5.2 Contraindications. Use of laser therapy in the cases of contraindication
must be approved by a specialist

page 41 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

5.2 CONTRAINDICATIONS

The list of contraindications gives the cases when the manufacturer does not recommend to apply the selected
therapy. A specialised medical workplace, realizing possible consequences, may decide to apply the therapy in spite
of it. However, in such case they bear all the responsibility for this action.

5.2.1 Contraindications for Electrotherapy


• active tuberculosis
• allergy to solutions used for dampening of the electrode cover sponges
• application in the areas of heart and eyes
• groundless stimulation - "placebo effect"
• pacemaker
• cardiovascular diseases
• cochlear implants
• metal implants and malignancies in the current path
• skin defects and skin inflammations
• bleeding conditions
• menstruation
• tumorous diseases
• sensitivity disorders (relative KI) in the area of electrode placement
• psychopathological syndromes and organic psychosyndromes
• multiple sclerosis
• pregnancy
• inflammation of veins and lymphatic paths

5.2.2 Contraindications for Ultrasound Therapy


• active tuberculosis
• allergy to the applied ultrasound gels
• application on peripheral nerves (located on the bone, close to the skin surface)
• application on endocrine glands
• application on areas around eyes, brain, spinal cord and heart
• emphysema, bronchiectasia
• epiphyses of growing bones
• gonads
• pacemaker
• cardiovascular diseases
• cochlear implants
• osseous protrusions just under the skin
• metal implants
• skin defects and skin inflammations
• blood diseases
• bleeding conditions
• menstruation
• tumorous diseases
• blood circulation deficiency
• conditions after laminectomy
• pregnancy

5.2.3 Contraindications for Laser Therapy


• application in the area of eyes – possibility of direct eye irradiation and damage to retina
• menstruation
• tumorous diseases
• Irradiation of malignancies and potentially precancerous growths
• Irradiation of patients with cochlear implants
• Irradiation of endocrine glands
• worn out patients, patients with febrile conditions

page 42 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

• pulse modes (whether red or infrared beams) must not be used for patients with anamnesis of seizure
(epilepsy)
• pregnancy

5.3 USEFUL ADDRESSES

The product is manufactured in accordance with the EU Medical Devices Directive by :

BTL Industries Ltd.


Suite 401 Albany House
324-326 Regents Street
London, W1B 3BL United Kingdom
E-mail: sales@btlnet.com
http://www.btlnet.com

For service, please contact service department at service@btlnet.com.

5.4 WARRANTY

The Manufacturer of this product warrants the product to be free from defects in workmanship and material for a
period of twelve months after the date of shipment from the factory. This warranty excludes any disposable items and
accessories, including, but not limited to cables or leads, power cords and electrodes. The manufacturer agrees to
correct such defects without charge, or at its option to replace the item with a comparable model. To register and be
eligible for warranty service, you must send or fax the fully completed warranty registration form within 30 days of
installation. All costs of shipment are the responsibility of the purchaser. Damage to any part such as by accident or
misuse or improper installation or by use of any accessories or abrasive material not produced by the Manufacturer is
not covered by this warranty. Because of varying climatic conditions, this warranty does not cover any changes in
finish, including rusting, pitting, corrosion, tarnishing or peeling. Servicing performed by unauthorized persons render
this warranty invalid. There is no other express warranty. The Manufacturer hereby disclaims any and all warranties,
including but not limited to, those of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose to the extent permitted by law.
The duration of any implied warranty which cannot be disclaimed is limited to the time period as specified in the
express warranty. The Manufacturer shall not be liable for incidental, consequential, or special damages arising out of,
or in connection with product use or performance except as may be otherwise accorded by law.

This warranty may differ from the warranty terms and conditions provided by your supplier and by applicable laws in
your country.

page 43 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

6 TECHNICAL PARAMETERS

6.1 TECHNICAL PARAMETERS OF THE BTL-4000 SERIES DEVICES

Device Type: BTL-4000 Series Optimal BTL-4000 Series Professional

Display: graphic
dimensions (mm): 70x38
resolution: 128 x 64

Low battery indication: on the display

Weight including the adapter (max.): 2.5 kg 3.1 kg


Dimensions (l x w x h) (mm): 350x160x145

Operating conditions:
temperature: + 10 °C to + 40 °C
relative humidity: 30 % to 75 %
atmospheric pressure 700 hPa to 1060 hPa
position horizontal – on legs
type of operation continuous

Transport and storage conditions:


temperature: - 10 °C to + 55 °C
relative humidity: 25 % to 85 %
atmospheric pressure 650 hPa to 1100 hPa
position any
time of storage: max. 1 year
transport only in the supplied packing
additional conditions:
recharge the accumulators at least 2x a year

Power supply: supply only via the external supply adapter BTL-228
input: 60 W
input voltage ~ 18 V to 25 V, alternating
frequency: 50 Hz to 60 Hz
protection class: II (according to IEC 536, ČSN 33 0600)
T5A / 250V, safety fuse on the printed circuit, acc. to IEC 127-2
internal fuse:
(replacement may only be done by the authorized service)
mains switch: on the rear panel of the device, positions 0 and I
power switch on the front panel of the device, marked on/off
covering: IP20

Internal chemical sources:


battery: lithium battery CR2032
lead accumulator: no 2x 6 V / 1.2 Ah, maintenance-free
1-2 hours of common use;
capacity of the accumulator: no strongly depends on the energy
intensiveness of the applied therapies
internal, time needed for 100 %
charger: no
charging is approx. 6 hours

Classification
applied parts type BF
class according to MDD 93/42/EEC IIb

Therapy duration
for electro and laser therapies 0 to 100 minutes
for ultrasound therapies 0 to 30 minutes
step of setting 1 second
accuracy of therapy time ± 2 % of the set value
Accuracy of time values 5 seconds per day

page 44 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

6.2 TECHNICAL PARAMETERS OF POWER SUPPLY ADAPTER BTL-228

Device Type: BTL-228

Operating conditions:
temperature: + 10 °C to + 40 °C
relative humidity: 30 % to 75 %
atmospheric pressure 700 hPa to 1060 hPa
position horizontal
type of operation continuous, use indoor only

Transport and storage conditions:


temperature: - 10 °C to + 55 °C
relative humidity: 25 % to 85 %
atmospheric pressure 650 hPa to 1100 hPa
position any
time of storage: max. 5 years

Power supply of the device:


maximum input: 70 W
input mains voltage 99V to 126V (115 V nominal), alternating
198V to 252V (230 V nominal), alternating
frequency: 50 Hz to 60 Hz
protection class: II (according to IEC 536, ČSN 33 0600)
T4A / 250V, tube fuse 5x20mm, according to IEC 127-2
fuse:
(replacement possible by user)
covering: IP20
type of connector of the device mini 2 poles

Output parameters
output voltage 18VAC
output current 3.6A
frequency: 50 Hz to 60 Hz

Insulation barriers
mains – output (output connector) 4kV

page 45 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

6.3 BASIC PARAMETERS OF ELECTROTHERAPY GENERATOR

Adjustable values
Output current* max. 140 mA (maximum instantaneous value)
Output current - HVT* max. 4 A (maximum instantaneous value)
Output current - microcurrents max. 999 µA (maximum instantaneous value)
Output voltage max. 130 V (maximum instantaneous value)
Output voltage - HVT max. 390 V (maximum instantaneous value)
*maximum value for some currents is limited according to IEC 601-2-10
Tolerance of output amplitude ± 10 % for 5 mA (5 V, 5 µA) and higher; otherwise ± 30 %
± 10 % for 35 V and higher; otherwise ± 30 % (for HVT)
Tolerance of time parameters of current standard ± 5 %; maximum ± 15 %
standard ± 20 % for modulation of HVT from 5 s; otherwise ± 30 %
Nominal load impedance 500 Ω
Internal output resistance in CV mode 96 Ω ± 10 %
Internal output resistance in CC mode 47 kΩ ± 10 %
Output capacity standard 150 pF
Output polarity – can be selected positive / negative / with reversal in the middle of the therapy
Positive polarity red banana plug = + = anode; black banana plug = - = cathode
Negative polarity red banana plug = - = cathode; black banana plug = + = anode

6.4 BASIC PARAMETERS OF ULTRASOUND GENERATOR

Adjustable values
Effective intensity
Continuous operation 0.1 to 2 W/cm2 ± 20 % for output intensity higher than 0.2W/cm2
Pulse operation 0.1 to 3 W/cm2 ± 20 % for output intensity higher than 0.2W/cm2
Working frequency - Optimal 1 MHz ± 5%
Working frequency - Professional 1 MHz ± 5% and 3.2 MHz ± 5%
Modulation frequency 10 to 150 Hz ± 5%
Duty factor 6 to 100% ± 5% of the set value
Duty factor 6.25% (1:16), 12.5% (1:8), 25% (1:4), 50% (1:2), 100% (1:1) ± 5% of the
set value
Maximum output power 12W

Parameters of pulses
Frequency 10 Hz Frequency 50 Hz Frequency 100Hz Frequency 150 Hz period
Duty period 100 ms period 20 ms period 10 ms 6.67 ms
factor Pulse Pause Pulse Pause Pulse Pause Pulse Pause
length length length length length length length length
50 % 50 ms 50 ms 10 ms 10 ms 5 ms 5 ms 3.33 ms 3.33 ms
25% 25 ms 75 ms 5 ms 15 ms 2.5 ms 7.5 ms 1.67 ms 5 ms
10% 10 ms 90 ms 2 ms 18 ms 1 ms 9 ms 0.67 ms 6 ms
6% 6 ms 94 ms 1.2 ms 18.8 ms 0.6 ms 9.4 ms 0.40 ms 6.27 ms

Steps of adjustable values


Intensity 0.1 W/cm2
Modulation frequency 10 Hz

6.5 BASIC PARAMETERS OF LASER GENERATOR

Indication of emission of laser radiation green pilot light on the probe, supplementary lighting of the probe, sound
Indication of readiness for emission on the screen
Indication of unreadiness for emission on the screen
Additional safety means - warning labels on the device case and on the probe
- warning label for the entrance door of the workplace
- remote control connector

page 46 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

Remote control connector (door switch)


input voltage AC / DC 5 V to 35 V (external power supply) / automatic polarity
recognition
input current max. 10mA
active level settable positive / negative logic

Adjustable values
Frequency*** 0 – 5000 Hz
accuracy of frequency ± 3 % of the set value
2
Dose* 0.1 – 100.0 J/cm
accuracy of dose ±20% (according to IEC 60601-2-22)
Area* 0.1 – 100.0 cm2
accuracy of area see BNR
Output* 5.0 – 500 mW (depending on the connected laser probe)
accuracy of output ±20% (according to IEC 60601-2-22)
Duty factor** 10 – 90 %
accuracy of duty factor ±1% of the range of DF
*) The stated values are maximum. The actual values depend on the type of the connected laser generator and on the purchased
configuration of the device
**) Can be set only in the pulse mode, in the continuous mode it is always 100%
***) Zero frequency means continuous operation of laser

6.6 TECHNICAL PARAMETERS OF ULTRASOUND HEADS

BTL-237-1-13 – small head


Effective radiation area (ERA)
ERA (ČSN EN 61689) 0.7 cm2 ± 20%
ERA (21 CFR 1050) 0.9 cm2 ± 20%
Maximum effective intensity 3 W/cm2 ± 20%
Maximum effective acoustic power 2.1 W ± 20%
Radiation frequency 1 MHz and 3.2 MHz ± 5%
Type of beam collimated
BNR <8
Covering grade according to EN 60 529 IP 67

BTL-237-4-13 – large head


Effective radiation area (ERA)
ERA (EN 61689) 3.2 cm2 ± 20%
ERA (21 CFR 1050) 4.4 cm2 ± 20%
Maximum effective intensity 3 W/ cm2 ± 20%
Maximum effective acoustic power 9.6 W ± 20%
Radiation frequency 1 MHz and 3.2 MHz ± 5%
Type of beam collimated
BNR <8
Covering grade according to EN 60 529 IP 67

6.7 TECHNICAL PARAMETERS OF LASER PROBES

Laser probes with red (visible) radiation:


Type: BTL-448-03RD BTL-448-03RC BTL-448-05RD BTL-448-05RC
Output power: 30 mW ± 20 % 30 mW ± 20 % 50 mW ± 20 % 50 mW ± 20 %
Wavelength: 685 nm 685 nm 685 nm 685 nm
Class*: 3B 3B 3B 3B
Beam: divergent collimated divergent collimated
Aperture: Ø 2 mm Ø 4.4 mm Ø 2 mm Ø 4.4 mm
BNR: 0.28 rad ± 0.05 rad 0.015 rad ± 0.005 rad 0.28 rad ± 0.05 rad 0.015 rad ± 0.005 rad
NOHD**: 0.2 m 2.3 m 0.2 m 3.4 m

page 47 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

Laser probes with infrared (invisible) radiation:


Type: BTL-448-05ID BTL-448-05IC BTL-448-10ID BTL-448-10IC
Output power: 50 mW ± 20 % 50 mW ± 20 % 100 mW ± 20 % 100 mW ± 20 %
Wavelength: 830 nm 830 nm 830 nm 830 nm
Class*: 3B 3B 3B 3B
Beam: divergent collimated divergent collimated
Aperture: Ø 2 mm Ø 4.4 mm Ø 2 mm Ø 4.4 mm
BNR: 0.28 rad ± 0.05 rad 0.015 rad ± 0.005 rad 0.28 rad ± 0.05 rad 0.015 rad ± 0.005 rad
NOHD**: 0.5 m 8.5 m 0.7 m 12.1 m

Type: BTL-448-20ID BTL-448-20IC BTL-448-30ID BTL-448-30IC


Output power: 200 mW ± 20 % 200 mW ± 20 % 300 mW ± 20 % 300 mW ± 20 %
Wavelength: 830 nm 830 nm 830 nm 830 nm
Class*: 3B 3B 3B 3B
Beam: divergent collimated divergent collimated
Aperture: Ø 2 mm Ø 4.4 mm Ø 2 mm Ø 4.4 mm
BNR: 0.28 rad ± 0.05 rad 0.015 rad ± 0.005 rad 0.28 rad ± 0.05 rad 0.015 rad ± 0.005 rad
NOHD**: 0.8 m 12.5 m 0.9 m 16.6 m

Type: BTL-448-40ID BTL-448-40IC


Output power: 400 mW ± 20 % 400 mW ± 20 %
Wavelength: 830 nm 830 nm
Class*: 3B 3B
Beam: divergent collimated
Aperture: Ø 2 mm Ø 4.4 mm
BNR: 0.28 rad ± 0.05 rad 0.015 rad ± 0.005 rad
NOHD**: 1.1 m 19.2 m
*Laser class is classified according to IEC 60601-2-22:1995 and IEC 60825-1:1993/A2:2001.
**NOHD – nominal ocular hazard distance (nominal distance from the laser aperture in which the eye damage by
laser beam should not happen)

6.8 APPLICABLE STANDARDS

Name IEC, EN, ISO, MDD


Medical electrical equipment.
IEC 601-1
Part 1: General requirements for safety
Amendments to IEC 601-1 A2, A11 a A12
Medical electrical equipment
Part 1: General requirements for safety IEC 60601-1-1
1.Collateral standard: Safety requirements for medical electrical systems
Z Medical electrical equipment
Part 1: General requirements for safety
IEC 601-1-2
2. Collateral Standard: Electromagnetic compatibility.
Requirements and tests
Industrial, scientific and medical (ISM) radio-frequency equipment - Radio disturbance
EN 55011
characteristics - Limits and methods of measurement
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 4: Testing and measurement techniques
IEC 61000-4-2
- Section 2: Electrostatic discharge immunity test - Basic EMC Publication
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 4: Testing and measurement techniques
IEC 61000-4-3
- Section 3: Radiated, radio frequency, electromagnetic field immunity test
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 4: Testing and measurement techniques
IEC 61000-4-4
- Section 4: Electrical fast transients/burst immunity test - Basic EMC Publication
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 4: Testing and measurement techniques
IEC 61000-4-5
- Section 5: Surge immunity test
Medical electrical equipment
Part 1: General requirements for safety IEC 601-1-4
4.Collateral standard: Programmable electrical medical systems
Medical devices – Risk analysis EN 14971

page 48 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

Biological evaluation of medical devices - Part 1: Evaluation and testing ISO 10 993-1
The Medical Devices Directive 93/42/EEC MDD 93/42/EEC
Medical electrical equipment
IEC 601-2-5
Part 2: Particular requirements for the safety of ultrasonic therapy equipment
Medical electrical equipment - Part 2: Particular requirements for the safety of nerve and
IEC 601-2-10
muscle stimulators
Medical electrical equipment
IEC 601-2-22
Part 2: Particular requirements for the safety of diagnostic and therapeutic laser equipment
Safety of laser products.
IEC 60 825-1
Part 1: Equipment classification, requirements and user's guide
Amendments to IEC 60 825-1 A1, A2

6.9 INTERCONNECTION WITH OTHER DEVICES

BTL-4000 Puls can be interconnected with: BTL vac, BTL-4000 Sono, BTL-5000 Sono, BTL-12, BTL-07p
BTL-4000 Combi can be interconnected with: BTL vac, BTL-12

page 49 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

This product is manufactured in accordance with the EU Medical Devices Directive by:

BTL Industries Ltd.


Suite 401 Albany House
324-326 Regents Street
London, W1B 3BL United Kingdom
E-mail: sales@btlnet.com
http://www.btlnet.com

For service, please contact service department at service@btlnet.com.

© All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced, saved in a research centre or transferred by any means incl.
electronic, mechanic, photographic or other records without previous approval from BTL Industries Limited

BTL Industries Limited operates a policy of continuous development. Therefore, it reserves the right to make changes and
improvements to the Product described in this manual without prior notice.

The contents of this document is provided "as is". Except as required by applicable law, no warranties of any kind, either expressed
or implied, are made in relation to the accuracy, reliability or contents of this document. BTL Industries Limited reserves the right to
revise this document or withdraw it at any time without prior notice.

page 50 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

7 CONFIGURATIONS OF DEVICES

7.1 CONFIGURATIONS OF COMBINED DEVICES


BTL-4000 COMBI

4810S 4810L 4800SL 4810S 4810L 4800SL


Type:
Professional Professional Professional Optimal Optimal Optimal
mains supply x x x x x x
built-in accumulator x x x
manual mode x x x x x x
predefined programs x x x x x x
predefined diagnoses x x x o o o
user programs 50 50 50 5 5 5
ultrasound head 1MHz x x
ultrasound head 1/3MHz x x
el. patient cables – basic x x
el. p. cab. with visual detection x x
possibility to connect BTL-vac x x x x
electrotherapies 1 1 1 1
ultrasound therapies 1 1 1 1
laser therapies 1 1 1 1
number of simultaneously
2 2 2 2 2 2
running therapies
number of simultaneously
1 1 1 1
running electrotherapies.
sound schemes x x x x x x
number of simultaneously
2 2 2 2 2 2
treated patients

7.2 CONFIGURATIONS OF ELECTROTHERAPY DEVICES


BTL-4000 PULS

4610 4615 4620 4625 4640 4610 4620 4625


Type:
Professional Professional Professional Professional Professional Optimal Optimal Optimal
mains supply x x x x x x x x
built-in accumulator x x x x x
manual mode x x x x x x x x
pre-defined programs x x x x x x x x
pre-defined diagnoses x x x x x o o o
user programs 50 50 50 50 50 5 5 5
ultrasound head 1MHz
ultrasound head 1/3MHz
el. patient cables – basic x x x
el. p. cab. with visual detection x x x x x
possibility to connect BTL-vac x x x x x x x x
electrotherapy outputs 1 1 2 2 4 1 2 2
ultrasound outputs
laser outputs
number of simultaneously
1 1 2 2 4* 1 2 2
running therapies
number of simultaneously
1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1
running electrotherapies.
sound schemes x x x x x x x x
number of simultaneously
1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1
treated patients
galvan x x x x x x x x
träbert, farad, neofarad x x x x x x x x
diadynamics x x x x x x x x
TENS x x x x x x x x
rectangular pulses x x x x x x
triangular pulses x x x x x x
exponential pulses x x x x x x
combined pulses x x x x x x
intermittent pulses
stimulation pulses x x x x x x
russian stimulation x x x x x x x x
2-pole interference x x x x x x x x
4-pole interference x x x x x
isoplanar field (interference) x x x
vector field (interference) x x x
HVT o o
h – waves x x x
spastic currents x

page 51 of 52
BTL-4000 SERIES USER'S MANUAL

micro currents x x x
leduc current x x x
mid-frequency waves x
pulses with exponential rise x x x x x x
preset sequences 20 20 20 20 5 5
electrodiagnostics x

7.3 CONFIGURATIONS OF ULTRASOUND DEVICES


BTL-4000 SONO

4710 4720
Type:
Professional Optimal
mains supply x x
built-in accumulator x
manual mode x x
number of ultrasound therapies 1 1
user programs 50 5
predefined diagnoses x o
preset programs x x
language versions x x
sound schemes x x
recent therapies 20 20
Ultrasound parameters:
head 1 MHz x
heads 1 and 3 MHz x
detection of contact continuous continuous
continuous mode of operation x x
pulse mode of operation x x
duty factor x x

7.4 CONFIGURATIONS OF LASER DEVICES


BTL-4000 LASER

4110 4110
Type:
Professional Optimal
mains supply x x
built-in accumulator x
manual mode x x
number of laser therapies 1 1
user programs 50 5
predefined diagnoses x o
preset programs x x
language versions x x
sound schemes x x
recent therapies 20 20

page 52 of 52
BTL-4000
Electrotherapy
USER‘S GUIDE

v100z1TN21/06/2004EN
ELECTROTHERAPY – USER‘S GUIDE

CONTENTS

1 GENERAL EFFECTS OF ELECTROTHERAPY.................................................................................................3


2 CLASSIFICATION OF ELECTROTHERAPEUTIC CURRENTS ........................................................................4
2.1 Galvanic Current ............................................................................................................................................4
2.2 Pulse Direct Current.......................................................................................................................................4
2.3 Alternating Current .........................................................................................................................................4
3 EFFECTS OF ELECTROTHERAPY ...................................................................................................................6
3.1 Analgesic Effect .............................................................................................................................................6
3.2 Myorelaxation and Spasmolytic Effect ...........................................................................................................7
3.3 Trophic Effect.................................................................................................................................................7
3.4 Antiedematous Effect .....................................................................................................................................7
3.5 Placebo Effect ................................................................................................................................................7
3.6 Deferring Effect ..............................................................................................................................................8
3.7 Contraindications for Electrotherapy ..............................................................................................................8
3.8 Symbols of Effects A-E-T-R-S........................................................................................................................8
4 SETUP AND CONTROL OF ELECTROTHERAPY ............................................................................................9
4.1 Common Parameters .....................................................................................................................................9
4.2 TENS ...........................................................................................................................................................10
4.3 2–pole, 4–pole, Isoplanar and Dipole Interference.......................................................................................10
4.4 Russian Stimulation .....................................................................................................................................11
4.5 Mid-frequency Surges ..................................................................................................................................11
4.6 Diadynamic Currents....................................................................................................................................12
4.7 Pulses: Rectangular, Triangular, Exponential and with Exponential Rise, Combined, Interrupted...............13
4.8 Stimulation Pulses........................................................................................................................................13
4.9 Träbert Current, Leduc Current, Faradic Current, Neofaradic Current, H-waves .........................................14
4.10 Galvanic Current ..........................................................................................................................................14
4.11 Microcurrents ...............................................................................................................................................14
4.12 Spastic Stimulation.......................................................................................................................................14
4.13 Pulse Modulation .........................................................................................................................................15
4.14 Interference – parameters............................................................................................................................16
4.15 Electrodiagnostics ........................................................................................................................................16
4.16 Combined Therapies....................................................................................................................................18
4.17 Specific Electrotherapy Settings ..................................................................................................................18
5 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR ELECTROTHERAPY..........................................................................................20
5.1 Use of Plate Electrodes................................................................................................................................20
6 TECHNICAL PARAMETERS OF ELECTROTHERAPY...................................................................................21
6.1 Parameters of Particular Therapies – Currents............................................................................................21
6.2 Modulation of Currents.................................................................................................................................26
6.3 Frequency Sweep (Interference)..................................................................................................................26
6.4 Steps of Setting of Parameters ....................................................................................................................26
6.5 Maximum Intensity Values ...........................................................................................................................27

page 2 of 29
ELECTROTHERAPY – USER‘S GUIDE

1 GENERAL EFFECTS OF ELECTROTHERAPY

Electrotherapy is one of widespread types of physical therapy (PT). When correctly indicated and applied it is very
effective. However, it cannot be lifted out of the context of comprehensive therapy, neither regarded as a cure-all.
Most of the physical procedures have similar effects and, depending on the parameters, some of them may be
dominant. The main effects are:
• analgesic,
• myorelaxation, trophic and antiedematous.
By selection of a procedure and its parameters you can select one of the above stated effects or their combination.

P.S. An important note about continuing education

Continuing education is a very important aspect of healthcare delivery. Many excellent resources are today available
to expand a user's knowledge about many aspects of electrical stimulation therapy. BTL recommends a thorough
review of this guide prior to operating the equipment and a search of educational reading material on the internet.

page 3 of 29
ELECTROTHERAPY – USER‘S GUIDE

2 CLASSIFICATION OF
ELECTROTHERAPEUTIC CURRENTS

2.1 GALVANIC CURRENT

Galvanic current (or “continuous”) is current of constant intensity. It is always DC. It is used mostly for iontophoresis,
or its trophic stimulative (hyperaemic) effect is utilized. A big disadvantage of the galvanic current is the risk of
chemical damage of the tissue under the electrodes. The damage may be caused by the hydrochloric acid which
originates under the anode or by the soda lye which originates under the cathode. Similar danger of the tissue
damage can occur also at any direct current (e.g. diadynamic). Direct currents must not be used for the patients
with metallic implants!
At present this current is often substituted by galvanic intermittent current. This current has the same effects (galvanic
component is 95 %) but thanks to interrupting of the originally continuous intensity by the frequency 8 kHz it is better
tolerated by the patients. It is suitable especially for iontophoresis.

2.2 PULSE DIRECT CURRENT

The pulse direct current is current of variable intensity but only one polarity. The basic pulse shape may vary. It
includes e.g. diadynamics (combination of pulse DC – "dosis" and galvanic current – "basis"), rectangular (e.g. Träbert
current), triangular and exponential pulses of one polarity.
Depending on the used frequency and intensity it has the stimulation, trophic and analgesic effects. Generally, direct
current with variable intensity implies the same risks as galvanic current (corrosion of the skin surface) and therefore it
requires careful observance of correct procedure, especially the correlation between the applied intensity and the
length of application.
The main effect is the stimulation which is important especially below the cathode (green negative electrode).

2.3 ALTERNATING CURRENT

In comparison with DC, alternating current is safer and better subjectively tolerated by the patient. The basic pulse
shape again may be various – rectangular, triangular, harmonic sinusoidal, exponential or combined. It can be
alternating, symmetric or asymmetric. The DC component is always zero, which prevents from chemical damage of
the skin under the electrodes.
Therefore this current enables also long-lasting applications, even for the patients with metal implants. Implanted
electronic stimulators such as pacemakers etc. are indeed absolutely contraindicated. Nowadays the low-power
pulses – TENS (Transcutaneous Electrical Nerve Stimulation) and interference – gain ground among the alternating
currents. Use of alternating currents in the contact electrotherapy implies much lower stress on the tissue under the
electrode.
For these types of current the capacitive component of skin resistance is involved, and also thanks to it these currents
are very well tolerated by the patients.
In general:
• short duration of the pulse improves the subjective perception,
• the zero average value (DC component) prevents from chemical damage of the tissue,
• frequency and amplitude are responsible for the required therapeutic effect.

2.3.1 TENS
TENS = transcutaneous electrical nerve stimulation
Nowadays very prevalent group of currents which substitutes the standard applications of diadynamic currents,
Russian stimulation, etc. TENS pulses are low-power and have zero DC component. Therefore, besides suppression
of chemical damage of the tissue, the risk of electric damage of the tissue is also minimized.
As can be seen from their name, these currents are intended for stimulation of nerve stems or nerve fibres. Their
major utilization is in alleviation of pain, inhibition of itching, etc. The mechanism of their effect is most often explained
by the so-called gate theory of pain. Besides treating of pain, these currents can be also effectively utilized in
electrogymnastics (stimulation of non-denervated muscles).

page 4 of 29
ELECTROTHERAPY – USER‘S GUIDE

2.3.2 Classic (Four-pole) Interference


Four electrodes are located crosswise. Two frequency signals with different frequencies fA and fB are brought to the
tissue. Their interference in the tissue induces a low-frequency surge in the centre of the cross; its frequency is:
AMF = fA - fB.
This surge of the frequency AMF has therapeutic effect, both basic currents of the frequency fA and fB are used only
for "transport" of the AMF surges to the tissue. The fA frequency is constant, changes of the fB frequency by the value
of so-called Spectrum serve for change of the resulting frequency AMF to the frequency AMF + Spectrum.
Interference has similar effects as the low-frequency currents although it is carried by current of higher frequency and
does not stress the tissue under the electrode so much. The carrier frequency of channels ranges from 3.5 to 10 kHz.
The higher this frequency, the better is it tolerated by the patient. The advantage of the four-pole interference is the in-
depth aiming of the treated area and lower stress on the superficial skin. Therefore there can be set higher intensity
values than for the two-pole application.

2.3.3 Two-pole Interference


According to the new recommended terminology, these groups should be called "bipolar-applied amplitude-modulated
mid-frequency currents"; however, owing to the length of this name we are keeping to the original one.
The resulting low-frequency current of the frequency AMF (or AMF + Spectrum) is created by the equipment.
Therefore two electrodes are sufficient for its application. The absolute intensity values that can be reached are lower
than for the classic interference (this current is worse tolerated by the patient than the classic interference) and at the
same time the stress on the skin surface is higher than for the classic interference.
Its advantage is that it can be applied by the point electrode and thus it can be effectively used in combination with
therapeutic ultrasound.

2.3.4 Isoplanar Interference


A special form of the four-pole interference where the additional modulation of both channels enables to distribute the
treated area to the whole space of the current circuits’ interlacement. It implies that placing of individual electrodes is
much easier – those do not need to form a perfect cross anymore. The effect of these currents is very diffuse, in-depth
and delicate.

2.3.5 Dipole Vector Field


Additional phase and amplitude modulation of basic signals of the four-pole interference enables to achieve the only
one direction of the electric field’s acting (so-called dipole is created in the tissue). In the direction of this dipole, the
modulation of the field reaches up to 100 %, in the other directions it is almost zero. You can either rotate this dipole
(abscissa) manually, and thus precisely aim the required effect of the therapy at the treated tissue, or let it rotate
automatically.

page 5 of 29
ELECTROTHERAPY – USER‘S GUIDE

3 EFFECTS OF ELECTROTHERAPY

3.1 ANALGESIC EFFECT

Pain is a multi-factor phenomenon and the practice positively shows that various types of pain respond more or less
well to various physiotherapeutic, i.e. also electrotherapeutic procedures. There are several mechanisms of the
analgesic effect of electrotherapy – besides the well-known gate theory of pain there is also proven increase of
production of endogenous opiates. The analgesic effect is also supported by trophic effects of the flowing current.
Timely myorelaxation removes the muscular hypertone and thus also pain of myofascial origin. Since the analgesic
effect of electrotherapy is fundamental and most utilized it shall be described in a little more details.
Pain is usually simply defined as an unpleasant sensuous and emotional experience connected with actual or
potential damage of the tissue. We usually distinguish between acute and chronic pain. Acute pain is short-lasting
(maximum several days or weeks). It is caused by mechanical damage of the tissue or by a disease, comes
immediately after the painful stimulus and subsides after its ending; the intensity of pain depends on the intensity of
stimulation. On the other hand, chronic pain is long-lasting (more than 3 months) or it recurs; its intensity does not
depend on the intensity of stimulation; emotions particularly play a leading role.
The now generally accepted theory of perception of pain is based on the assumption of existence of a specific
sensory system which transfers information from receptors of pain (nociceptors) to the central nervous system by
preformed special nerve paths. However, the process is in fact much more complicated and persons interested can
learn about it from the available specialized literature.
To understand the effects of electrotherapy it is important to understand especially the modulation factors which can
influence the perception and transfer of the painful stimulus:
• First crucial modulation factor is described by the so-called gate theory of pain which is based on the presumption
that the nervous mechanism in posterior medullary horns act as a small gate which lets through only limited flow
of nervous impulses from the peripheral afferent fibres to the central nervous system, depending on how much it
is opened. Stimulation of some particular fibres can modulate the extent of the gate’s opening or closing for pain
and thus also increase or decrease transfer of the nociceptive information. A similar gate system is supposed to
exist also on the level of thalamus.
• The other important modulation factor is described by the neuromodulation theory which is based on the
analgesic effect of some substances belonging to the group of so-called neuromodulators, especially endorphins
and encephalins. These substances are produced in the central nervous system and according to the mentioned
theory they have crucial importance especially for subjective perception of pain.
Anyway, the analgesic effect of electrotherapy is used most often. To make PT a real benefit for the patient, it is
necessary to observe the following principles:
• Do not suppress the signalling and protective function of pain (which is especially important for acute pain!), i.e. at
first decrypt the information being signalled by the pain, properly determine the diagnosis or at least a preliminary
hypothesis and only then intervene against the pain. Pain modified by PT or analgesics can loose its specificity
insomuch that later it cannot be decrypted.
• Together with application of analgesic PT it is necessary to considerably reduce administering of analgesics. This
rule is very important, owing to the possibility of relatively precise aiming of the analgesic effect of PT (in contrast
to the unaimed effect of medicaments) and possible undesired interaction between PT and the medicaments.
• When choosing the type of PT consider the expected effect (gate theory, endorphins).
• For chronic or recurrent complaints do not obstinately apply various types of PT, but examine the locomotive
system (or get it examined by a specialist) – very often the source of these complaints is far from the place of
projection of pain (catenation-generalization).
For stimulation of thick, myelinized nerve fibres of A beta and delta types (gate theory) it is suitable to use low-
frequency currents of the frequency 50 - 150 Hz (optimum 100 Hz) and intensity at or above threshold sensitivity. This
method is effective especially for acute and segmentally localised pains. For chronic painful syndromes it is most
suitable to use low frequencies 2 - 8 Hz and intensity at the highest tolerable level (up to the threshold of pain); thus
thin fibres of C type are stimulated (creation of endorphins). For achievement of combination of both above-stated
mechanisms of easing of pain use the "burst modulation". The carrier frequency should be about 100 Hz, burst
frequency up to 10 Hz (even frequencies lower than 1 Hz are not exceptional). Currents with burst modulation bring
the cumulated analgesic effect. By the depth of the required effect the procedures can be ordered as follows (from the
most superficial to the deepest ones):
• analgesic effect of anelectrotonus (galvanic current)
• diadynamic currents LP and CP-ISO
• Träbert current

page 6 of 29
ELECTROTHERAPY – USER‘S GUIDE

• TENS
• 2-pole interference (amplitude-modulated mid-frequency currents),
• 4-pole interference, isoplanar interference and vector fields

3.2 MYORELAXATION AND SPASMOLYTIC EFFECT

Especially after the posturographic examination had proved that overall administering of so-called myorelaxancies has
a negative long-term influence on the body posture, the possibility of exact aiming at the hypertonic muscle has been
regarded as an especially valuable advantage of myorelaxation procedures. At overall application of myorelaxancies
there are first affected the phasic muscles which have been already weakened due to the layer syndrome. Later, or
when stronger dose is applied, there are also affected the tonic muscles and only at the end, at the strongest dosage,
also hypertonic muscles are positively affected. This effect lasts for several weeks and affects the static of the spine
very negatively even after the acute complaints have subsided.
Procedures with myorelaxation effect include therapeutic ultrasound, 2-pole interference with contour frequency 100 –
200 Hz, 4-pole interference currents and high-voltage therapy in the same frequency modulation band. For small
superficial muscles especially on hands also paraffin can be used.
A favourable side effect of myorelaxation is also the analgesic effect.

3.3 TROPHIC EFFECT

is caused by hyperaemia which occurs in almost all types of PT (except cryotherapy). Since the mechanism of
hyperaemia in various types of PT is different, it is necessary to take these mechanisms into account so as to be able
to select the particular PT. Generally, galvanization can be recommended, especially longitudinal (capillary
hyperaemia, vessel eutonisation), low-frequency currents of the frequency 30 - 60 Hz and the intensity at or above the
threshold motor activity level (muscle micropump) or ultrasound, laser, polarized specified achromatic light, vacuum-
overpressure therapy, etc.
The trophic effect may be partly caused by the fact that most forms of PT, esp. laser, biolamp and magnetotherapy,
bring energy into the organism, to be used by cells (or other structures) for their activity.
The trophic hyperaemic effect is also usually connected with the analgesic effect.

3.4 ANTIEDEMATOUS EFFECT

is practically connected with hyperaemia, vessel eutonisation and higher capillary permeability. Therefore the
therapies referred to as trophic are also antiedematous (see the previous paragraph).

3.5 PLACEBO EFFECT

Opponents of the physical therapy tend to refer to its effects as placebo.


If PT is applied accidentally, without knowledge of its mechanism, accurate aiming and dosage (as it often happens),
its effects can be called like this. Exact verification of the effects of PT faces many troubles.

• Owing to the fact that lege artis application of PT requires to take into account especially the patient's individuality
and momentary functional status (including the limbic system status, mood, muscular tonus, season of the year,
weather, motivation, attitude to the troubles, etc.) it is almost impossible to create a group for further statistical
processing. Creation of a control group is practically out of question.
• The effect of PT lies almost only in affecting of the afferent system. The afferent system processes all data,
including the visual, auditory, tactile and other analysers. Since very often a slight stimulus is sufficient to deviate
the organism from the existing functional balance (even the pathological one) and, using its enormous self-
reparation abilities, the organism helps itself, there cannot be carried out e.g. a blind experiment without at least
minimum excitation of an afferent system and/or higher components of CNS.
• Functional defects of the locomotive organs which belong to the main positive effects of PT tend to self-repair, if
they are not prevented from that (e.g. by inappropriate pharmacotherapy). If correctly indicated, PT both initiates
and accelerates this self-reparation, which indeed can be hardly exactly proved.

page 7 of 29
ELECTROTHERAPY – USER‘S GUIDE

3.6 DEFERRING EFFECT

A "troublesome" patient is often invited for the check examination only after undergoing of usually ten procedures and
"hopefully will be better then". This way of thinking is immoral, unethical and discreditable to a specialist, but
nevertheless most of the existing prescriptions of PT unfortunately belong to this category. In some surgeries the
patients are even told that the effect of the chosen PT will come only after several months (!), which means that the
physician fully relies on the organism's self-reparation abilities.
Indication of PT then should not be based only on the diagnosis, especially if the diagnosis is confusing, e.g.
periarthritis humeroscapularis etc.
The attending physician should know the answers to the following questions:
• What is the cause of the complaints, i.e. usually pain?
• Is the defect functional or organic?
• Where was the defect initiated – where is (are) the key area(s)?
• Which of the above-mentioned effects of PT is the most important for the patient at the moment?
• Is there not a risk of aggravation or organification of the functional defect after the chosen PT?
By these answers the physician should choose the type, location, intensity, frequency and total number of treatments,
and, in relation to them, also the date of the check examination of the patient.

3.7 CONTRAINDICATIONS FOR ELECTROTHERAPY

• active TB
• allergy to the solutions used for moistening of the electrode sponge covers
• application in the area of heart or eyes
• pacemaker
• cardiovascular diseases
• cochlear implants
• metal implants and/or malignancies in the current path
• skin defects and inflammations
• bleeding
• menstruation
• tumours
• defects of sensitivity in the point of location of the electrode
• psychopathological syndromes and organic psychosyndromes
• multiple sclerosis
• pregnancy
• inflammations of veins and lymphatic paths

3.8 SYMBOLS OF EFFECTS A-E-T-R-S

Symbols of effects of therapy used in the equipment have the following meaning:
A - analgesic
E - antiedematous
T - trophic
R - myorelaxation
S - myostimulation

page 8 of 29
ELECTROTHERAPY – USER‘S GUIDE

4 SETUP AND CONTROL OF ELECTROTHERAPY

4.1 COMMON PARAMETERS

4.1.1 Output Mode


CC (= constant current) mode – in this mode the current flowing through the patient is constant, regardless of
impedance of the patient's tissue. Owing to physiological effects during electrotherapy the impedance of the tissue
decreases, which in the normal course of events causes spontaneous rise of the current flowing through the patient
which can be unpleasant. The CC mode is therefore useful for most of the static applications with fixed electrodes
(including e.g. the suction cups).
However, if you want to use point electrodes, combined therapy with ultrasound head, moving electrodes (e.g. roller)
etc., it is suitable to switch over to the constant voltage mode because moving of the electrode in the current mode
would cause temporary reduction of the contact area between the electrode and the patient's skin and consequently
significant rise of the current density, which could be painful for the patient.
Similarly for the therapies where muscle contractions are expected and/or electrodes could slightly move on the skin it
is suitable to select the constant voltage mode of stimulation.

CV (= constant voltage) mode – in this mode the voltage on the electrodes is constant. Owing to physiological
effects the current in the tissue may slightly rise during therapy and therefore it is usually necessary to adjust the set
intensity according to the patient's feelings, approximately every one or two minutes. Still this mode is suitable
especially in the cases where the CC mode would bring problems – pain and reduction of output intensity – i.e. at the
applications with moving electrodes and at the applications which are accompanied by muscle contraction.

4.1.2 Polarity
• positive polarity: socket marked "+" is anode (use the cable with red banana plugs)
socket marked "-“ is cathode (use the cable with white or black banana plugs)

• negative polarity: the polarity of sockets is reversed ("+" = cathode; "-" = anode)

• positive, reversal: the first half of therapy has positive polarity of signal, in the middle of therapy the
polarity automatically changes to negative

• negative, reversal: the first half of therapy has negative polarity of signal, in the middle of therapy the
polarity automatically changes to positive

• pos., rev. with interrupt.: the first half of therapy has positive polarity of signal, in the middle of therapy the
polarity automatically changes to negative; at the change the equipment interrupts
therapy and waits for re-setting of correct intensity

• neg., rev. with interrupt: the first half of therapy has negative polarity of signal, in the middle of therapy the
polarity automatically changes to positive; at the change the equipment interrupts
therapy and waits for re-setting of correct intensity

4.1.3 Therapy Time


can be set within the range from 00:01 to 99:59 [min:sec].

4.1.4 Physiological Effects


characterize particular diagnoses and programs and can be adjusted. For the meaning of particular symbols see
chapter 3.8 Symbols of Effects A-E-T-R-S.

page 9 of 29
ELECTROTHERAPY – USER‘S GUIDE

4.2 TENS

4.2.1 Type
symmetric – the positive pulse is immediately followed by the negative one

alternating – the positive pulses regularly alternate with the negative ones

asymmetric – positive rectangular pulses are followed by exponential pulses of negative polarity.
Nowadays the most widespread type of TENS, probably because of its favourable effects which are
similar to those of DC pulses, and electrochemical properties corresponding to AC.

4.2.2 Pulse, Frequency, Pause


In this dialog box it is possible to set basic parameters of the generated TENS – TENS pulse length, pause between
TENSes or TENS frequency. All these three parameters are mutually related by the following mathematical relations
and therefore at change of one parameter the other ones can change too:
symmetric TENS:
frequency = 1 000 000 / (2 * pulse + 1000 * pause) [Hz; µs, ms]
alternating TENS:
frequency = 1 000 000 / (2 * pulse + 2000 * pause) [Hz; µs, ms]
asymmetric TENS:
frequency = 1 000 000 / (7 * pulse + 1000 * pause) [Hz; µs, ms]

Note: The relations are based on the electric waveform of TENS and the way of their generating.

4.2.3 Electro Parameters


For details see 4.13 Pulse Modulation.

4.3 2–POLE, 4–POLE, ISOPLANAR AND DIPOLE INTERFERENCE

4.3.1 Carrier Frequency


Frequency of the "carrier" which "transports" to the tissue (for the two-pole interference) or creates in the tissue (for
the four-pole interference) a low-frequency therapeutic surge.

I [mA]

t [s]
Carrier frequency (high frequency)

Frequency of therapeutic surges (low frequency)

4.3.2 Electro Parameters


For details see 4.14 Interference – parameters.

page 10 of 29
ELECTROTHERAPY – USER‘S GUIDE

4.3.2.1 Isoplanar Interference – "Field Rotation"


Isoplanar vector field is a special form of four-pole interference where amplitude modulation of both channels causes
the even, almost 100 % modulation in the entire area of current circuits intersection. The nature of these regular
amplitude changes of channels corresponds to "rotation" of the whole field. This parameter should be best set to the
value which equals to the entire sweep time (for the continuous and jump sweep it is the sum of all set times, for the
symmetric sweep set the rotation time equal to the sweep time).

4.3.2.2 Dipole Interference – Dipole Rotation


For the dipole vector field with automatically rotating dipole
you can set the speed of rotation of this dipole in the area of
intersection of current circuits.
In the direction of the dipole the depth of modulation is always maximum, in
the other directions it is minimum.

4.4 RUSSIAN STIMULATION

4.4.1 Carrier Frequency


Frequency of the "carrier" which "transports" low-frequency therapeutic pulses to the tissue – similarly as for the two-
pole interference where the carrier transports there low-frequency surges.

4.4.2 Pulse Frequency, DF


In this dialog box it is possible to set the frequency of low-frequency pulses.
DF (duty factor) parameter is the ratio of the pulse length to the length of the
pause between pulses.

4.4.3 Pulse Length (Electro Parameters)


In this dialog, which is similar to that for setting of trapezoid surges – see 4.13.5 Trapezoid Surges, it is possible to
set the rise time of amplitude of low-frequency currents, time of stimulation, fall time and time of relaxation.

4.5 MID-FREQUENCY SURGES

These stimulation pulses are in principle similar to Russian stimulation but have
wider portfolio of possibilities of individual settings.

4.5.1 Carrier Frequency


See 4.4.1 Carrier Frequency.

4.5.2 Pulse, Frequency, Pause


In this dialog box it is possible to set the basic parameters of generated pulses – length of pulse of the mid-frequency
surge, pause between pulses and pulse frequency. All these three parameters are mutually related by the following
mathematical relation and therefore at change of one parameter the other ones can change too:

frequency = 1 000 / (pulse + pause) [Hz; ms, ms]

The limits of setting of the individual parameters are determined by the carrier frequency.

4.5.3 Electro Parameters


The parameters to set are the same as for most of the basic stimulation pulses. For details see 4.13 Pulse
Modulation.

page 11 of 29
ELECTROTHERAPY – USER‘S GUIDE

4.6 DIADYNAMIC CURRENTS

4.6.1 Type
The basic types of diadynamic currents are as follows:

DF: basic diadynamic pulses of the frequency 100 Hz or 120 Hz – "two-way-


rectified mains frequency" (according to the mains frequency 50 / 60 Hz)

MF: basic diadynamic pulses of the frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz – "one-way-


rectified mains frequency" (according to the mains frequency 50 / 60 Hz)

CP: diadynamic pulses created by combination of types DF and MF, the


pulses alternate every 1 second for the basic frequency 50 Hz and every 1.2
second for the basic frequency 60 Hz

CP-ISO: the same combination of pulses DF and MF, but the mutual intensity
of currents is equalized by the base-line (owing to the difference in perception
of DF and MF, intensity of the MF current is 11 % lower than that of the DF
current)

LP: diadynamic current with smooth transitions between DF and MF surges.


The whole change of the MF surge to DF and back to MF lasts 10 or 12
seconds and the length of the MF surge is 6 or 7.2 seconds (according to the
basic frequency 50 Hz / 60 Hz)

RS: diadynamic current combined of the MF current (time 1 or 1.2 second) and
a pause (length 1 or 1.2 second – according to the basic frequency 50 / 60 Hz)

4.6.2 Base
To the pulse component of the diadynamic current there is added the galvanic component – base. It can be defined
proportionally – the base component represents the set percentage of the total intensity.

4.6.3 Electro Parameters

4.6.3.1 Basic Frequency


Basic frequency which the diadynamic pulses are derived from. It is based on the frequency of the mains – for the
countries with the mains frequency 50 Hz (Europe, Asia) set the option 50 Hz / 100 Hz; for the countries with the
mains frequency 60 Hz you can use the option 60 Hz / 120 Hz. You can select the option according to your practice,
but please note that the original basic frequency of diadynamic currents was 50 Hz (these currents were discovered
accidentally by the dentist Bernard in France – see PODĚBRADSKÝ, J., VAŘEKA, I. Fyzikální terapie I.. Praha:
Grada, 1998.)

4.6.3.2 Interruption
This option switches on the "momentary interruption" of the generated
waveform. The length of the interruption is 5 µs and the repeating frequency
of interruption is 8000 Hz. As for power there is no change in the generated
waveform (duty factor is 96 %) but the patient's tolerance is higher.

page 12 of 29
ELECTROTHERAPY – USER‘S GUIDE

4.7 PULSES: RECTANGULAR, TRIANGULAR, EXPONENTIAL AND


WITH EXPONENTIAL RISE, COMBINED, INTERRUPTED

4.7.1 Type
monophasic – pulses of only one polarity (ATTENTION! These pulses have galvanic effect!)

symmetric – the positive pulse is immediately followed by the negative one

alternating – the positive pulses regularly alternate with the negative ones

asymmetric, combined - positive rectangular pulses are followed by exponential pulses of negative
polarity. Their effects are similar to those of DC pulses but the electrochemical properties correspond to
AC.

4.7.2 Pulse, Frequency, Pause


In this dialog box it is possible to set the basic parameters of generated pulses – pulse length, pause between pulses
and pulse frequency. All these three parameters are mutually related by the following mathematical relations and
therefore at change of one parameter the other ones can change too:
monophasic pulses:
frequency = 1 000 / (pulse + pause) [Hz; ms, ms]
symmetric pulses:
frequency = 1 000 / (2 * pulse + pause) [Hz; ms, ms]
alternating pulses:
frequency = 1 000 / (2 * pulse + 2 * pause) [Hz; ms, ms]
asymmetric pulses:
frequency = 1 000 / (pulse + 7 * pause) [Hz; ms, ms]

Note: The relations are based on the electrical waveform of the pulses and the way of their generating.

4.7.3 Electro Parameters


For details see 4.13 Pulse Modulation.

4.8 STIMULATION PULSES

4.8.1 Type
The two basic types suitable for stimulation are rectangular and triangular.

4.8.2 Pulse, Pause


The setup dialog is similar to that in 4.7.2 Pulse, Frequency, Pause, but it is
possible to set only the pulse length and pause length. For correct stimulation
by individual pulses it is recommended to keep the following relation:

tPAUSE = 0.003 * tPULSE [s; ms]

4.8.3 Electro Parameters

4.8.3.1 Sound Signal


The sound signal indicates the moment of generation of the stimulation pulse. Possible settings:
beep – the length of beep corresponds to the length of the generated pulse
click – short "click" indicates the beginning of the generated pulse
no sound.

page 13 of 29
ELECTROTHERAPY – USER‘S GUIDE

4.9 TRÄBERT CURRENT, LEDUC CURRENT, FARADIC CURRENT,


NEOFARADIC CURRENT, H-WAVES

Special types of pulse currents, for their parameters see chapter Technical Parameters.

4.10 GALVANIC CURRENT

4.10.1 Type
Continuous or interrupted. The length of interruption is 5 µs, repeating frequency is 8000 Hz.

4.11 MICROCURRENTS

are designed for application by tip or point electrode.

4.11.1 Type
The waveforms of the particular current types are best illustrated in the following table :

rectangular monophasic
rectangular symmetric
rectangular alternating
triangular monophasic
triangular symmetric
triangular alternating
exponential monophasic
exponential symmetric
exponential alternating
combined

4.11.2 Pulse, Frequency, Pause


This dialog is the same as the dialog 4.7.2 Pulse, Frequency, Pause for standard pulses.

4.11.3 Electro Parameters


For details see 4.13 Pulse Modulation.

4.12 SPASTIC STIMULATION

4.12.1 Pulse, Delay, (Frequency)


It is possible to set the length of T1 pulses, which are generated by channel E1,
the length of T2 pulses, which are generated by channel E2, delay between
pulses T1 and T2 and repeating frequency of pulses.
It is also possible to set independently the polarity of pulses T1 and T2 – see
buttons polarity 1 and polarity 2.

page 14 of 29
ELECTROTHERAPY – USER‘S GUIDE

4.13 PULSE MODULATION

4.13.1 Constant Frequency


The set current has no supplementary modulation and is not further
influenced. See picture – rectangular pulses.

4.13.2 Random Frequency


During generation the frequency of the generated current randomly
changes within the range approx. ± 30 %. See the picture with random
"compression" of rectangular pulses.

4.13.3 Burst
Low-energy group of several pulses following immediately one after
another. It is possible to set the number of pulses in burst and
frequency of bursts [Hz]. For information there is calculated the pause
between bursts [ms] and burst length [ms]. It is also possible to choose from several pre-defined values.

4.13.4 Sine Surges


High-energy group of pulses which can cause e.g. a muscle contraction. It is
possible to set the sine surge length [s] (= stimulation time) and pause
between surges [s] = relaxation time.
It is also possible to choose from several pre-set values.

4.13.5 Trapezoid Surges


High-energy group of pulses which can cause e.g. a muscle contraction. It is
possible to set the trapezoid surge rise time [s] = time of rise of stimulation,
stimulation time [s], trapezoid surge fall time [s] = subsiding of
stimulation, and pause between surges [s] = relaxation time.
It is also possible to choose from several pre-set values.

4.13.6 Symmetric Surges


High-energy group of pulses which can cause e.g. a muscle contraction. It is
actually a symmetric trapezoid surge with a different way of setting. It is
possible to set the sweep time [s] – i.e. the stimulation and relaxation time,
always including rise (or fall) time, and so called contour [%] – i.e. ratio
between the actual stimulation time and the stimulation rise time. It is
possible to choose from several pre-set values

page 15 of 29
ELECTROTHERAPY – USER‘S GUIDE

4.14 INTERFERENCE – PARAMETERS

4.14.1 AMF and Spectrum


AMF is the basic frequency of therapeutic surges which is created in the tissue by interference (e.g. by combination of
the signal of channel E1 with the signal of channel E2). This applies for the four-pole interference. For the two-pole
interference the surges of the basic frequency AMF are directly "transported" to the tissue by the carrier.

I [mA]

t [s]
Carrier frequency (high frequency)

Frequency of therapeutic surges (low frequency)

Spectrum determines the extent of change of the basic frequency of therapeutic surges – AMF. The resulting
frequency of therapeutic surges then ranges from AMF to AMF + Spectrum and changes according to the set way of
frequency sweep.

4.14.2 Frequency Sweep


defines the ways of sweep of the resulting frequency of therapeutic surges between AMF and AMF + Spectrum:
• continuous (rise of frequency, upper hold, fall and lower hold)
• continuous, random
• in jumps (upper and lower hold)
• in jumps, random
• symmetric (time of change = "sweep time", "contour")
• symmetric, random.

The differences among particular ways of sweep are displayed in the following pictures:

The difference between standard and random way of sweep is again best illustrated in the following two pictures. In
the classic way of sweep the change of frequency always involves two values – AMF and AMF + Spectrum. In the
random way of sweep the equipment selects the resulting generated frequencies randomly from the values between
AMF and AMF + Spectrum. This way of sweep reduces the risk that the tissue gets used to the generated
frequencies and thus in some cases it increases the success of therapy:

4.15 ELECTRODIAGNOSTICS

4.15.1 Motor Point Detection


Before any electrodiagnostic measuring first find the motor point of the muscle,
i.e. the point in which the muscle stimulation is the most significant –
contraction is initiated by the lowest set value of intensity. You should also
determine by which electrode (cathode or anode) the measuring will be done.

page 16 of 29
ELECTROTHERAPY – USER‘S GUIDE

Anode – positive electrode (red banana plug) connect to the plate electrode as a reference electrode. This electrode
shall be placed proximally or distally to the treated muscle. It is also possible to use suction cup electrode –
continuous vacuum mode.
Cathode – negative electrode (black banana plug) is connected to the stimulation point electrode.

For finding the motor point it is recommended to use pulses of the length approx. 5 ms for the healthy muscle and
approx. 100 ms for the denervated muscle. The pause between pulses should be 2 - 3 seconds. After finding the
motor point reverse the polarity of the output current (positive polarity → negative, or shift the electrodes – red
banana plug to the point electrode and the black one to the reference electrode) and measure the muscle sensitivity
for the reversed polarity of the signal (the stimulation electrode in this case is anode). For further stimulation use that
connection of electrodes (polarity) for which the muscle is more sensitive.

4.15.2 Accommodation Coefficient


is measured in the motor point of the muscle by a triangular and a rectangular pulse, with the electrode polarity which
was determined as more sensitive when detecting the motor point.
Accommodation coefficient is a ratio between intensity of the triangular pulse and the intensity of the rectangular
pulse. Pulse width is 1000 ms and pause between pulses is 3 seconds. First measure the rectangular pulse, after its
measuring and saving by the time / stop knob (17) the equipment automatically switches to measuring by the
triangular pulse. The set intensity is displayed in the upper box on the screen, the lower box displays the current
measured value of the accommodation coefficient with verbal diagnosis.
It is recommended to write in the note if the stimulation point electrode was cathode or anode.

4.15.3 I/t Curve


is measured in the motor point of the muscle by a triangular or a rectangular pulse, with the electrode polarity which
was determined as more sensitive when detecting the motor point.

4.15.3.1I/t Curve – („o”-options)


This menu includes the following options:
• edit point: to set quickly and directly the pulse length and
pause length
• delete point: to delete the measured point of the curve
from the graph
• new curve - rectangular pulses: to add a new I/t curve to
the graph to be measured by rectangular pulses
• new curve - triangular pulses: to add a new I/t curve to
the graph to be measured by triangular pulses
• delete curve: to delete the curve from the graph
• import curve: to load an I/t curve from the equipment's memory to the graph
• save curve: to save the I/t curve
• motor point detection
• calculation of chronaxie-rheobase: active only if the graph displays only one curve
• calculation of accommodation coefficient: active only if the graph displays two curves – one measured by
triangular pulses and the other by rectangular pulses
• calculation of stimulation: active only if the graph displays two curves measured by triangular pulses

4.15.3.2I/t Curve – Properties („p“ – properties)


In this screen define the name of I/t curve and supplementary information and assign it to a patient.

4.15.3.3I/t Curve – Measuring


To move along the time axis and change the length of the generated pulse turn the time / stop knob.

page 17 of 29
ELECTROTHERAPY – USER‘S GUIDE

To set intensity of the generated pulse turn the intensity knob.


To insert the set value of intensity to the graph press the time / stop knob.
Plastic buttons >> and << on the screen serve for selection which of the displayed I/t curves will be active – this curve
will be then dealt with in the menu and during measuring, etc.

4.16 COMBINED THERAPIES

4.16.1 Polarity of Ultrasound Head


Polarity of the ultrasound head is set on the display:
• anode (+) – in this case select on the display for generator E1 (or on the electrotherapy display) the output
polarity "positive“
• cathode (-) – in this case select on the display for generator E1 (or on the electrotherapy display) the output
polarity "negative"
The other electrode to be connected to the patient is the reference electrode of the respective electrotherapy
generator (standardly E1). This electrode is connected to the output (-) on the electrotherapy, preferably by the black
cable.

4.16.2 Setting of Parameters of Combined Therapy

4.16.2.1BTL-4000 Combi Devices


Combined therapies can be started from the electrotherapy generator with the symbol of ultrasound head on its tab –
see picture. Usually it is the electrotherapy generator E1.
Only the lists of this generator contain combined therapies, including combined diagnoses, combined programs and
manual selection of therapy.

After selecting the combined therapy (no


matter if in the list of diagnoses – diag,
the list of programs – prog or using
manual control – man) the electro
generator screen displays the standard
electro parameters setup screen with the
added "parameters ultrasound" button.

After pressing the "parameters ultrasound" button you can set all parameters of the ultrasound therapy as required.
For detailed description of ultrasound parameters see the Ultrasound Therapy User's Guide.

4.16.2.2Connected Devices BTL-4000 Pulse and BTL-4000 Sono


For the schematic drawing of interconnection of these devices see the User's Manual. The devices are controlled
separately, therapies are run on each device individually. On the BTL-4000 Sono device start therapy on the
generator U1 and check off the option "with electro".

4.17 SPECIFIC ELECTROTHERAPY SETTINGS

4.17.1 Check of Contact of Electrodes


Here it is possible to disable (or enable) the check of contact of the electrodes with the patient's body during therapy.
From the factory this function is ON. We recommend to disable it only if you want to use electrotherapy especially for
motor stimulations.

page 18 of 29
ELECTROTHERAPY – USER‘S GUIDE

4.17.2 Measuring of Electrodes


The electrodes which are applied to the patient's body during therapy are
subject to ageing which proves itself by gradual growth of their resistance up to the level where further use is
impossible (the device keeps displaying the message "bad contact of electrodes with the patient"). The usability time
of the electrodes depends especially on the used types of currents.
This function serves for checking of quality of electrodes. The check starts after pressing of the "start/stop" button.
The current status of electrodes is displayed in the bottom part. After switch-on press the electrodes against each
other – then the device displays the text result.

page 19 of 29
ELECTROTHERAPY – USER‘S GUIDE

5 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR ELECTROTHERAPY

5.1 USE OF PLATE ELECTRODES

The equipment can work with plate BTL electrodes. For plate electrodes use sponge covers moistened by water (or
by therapeutic solution in case of iontophoresis). Before first use of the covers it is necessary to rinse them in tepid
water. Moistening of covers or sponges prevents the patient from burning. When generating low-energy currents
(TENS) apply side 1 of the electrode in the sponge cover to the patient's body. One ply of the sponge cover will be
between the electrode and the patient's skin. For high-energy currents (recommended for all currents except TENS)
apply side 2 of the electrode in the sponge cover to the patient's body.

1 cover

electrode

2
Before first use rinse the electrode sponge covers thoroughly in tepid water. From the manufacturing they are
impregnated with special substance which prevents them from going mouldy.

After washing and drying the electrode covers harden. It is not a defect – after moistening they will get soft again.

page 20 of 29
ELECTROTHERAPY – USER‘S GUIDE

6 TECHNICAL PARAMETERS OF ELECTROTHERAPY

6.1 PARAMETERS OF PARTICULAR THERAPIES – CURRENTS

6.1.1 TENS

type: symmetric, alternating, asymmetric


pulse: 10 to 400 µs
pause: 0.15 to 2 500 ms (depending on the pulse length, pulse type and
the set frequency)
frequency: 0.2 to 1 000 Hz (alternating)
0.4 to 1 000 Hz (symmetric, asymmetric)
modulation: see Modulation of Currents below

6.1.2 4-pole Interference

carrier frequency: 3 600 to 10 000 Hz


AMF: 0 to 200 Hz
Spectrum: 0 to 200 Hz
frequency sweep: see Frequency Sweep below

6.1.3 2-pole Interference

carrier frequency: 3 600 to 10 000 Hz


AMF: 0 to 200 Hz
Spectrum: 0 to 200 Hz
frequency sweep: see Frequency Sweep below

6.1.4 Isoplanar Interference

carrier frequency: 3 600 to 10 000 Hz


AMF: 0 to 200 Hz
Spectrum: 0 to 200 Hz
frequency sweep: see Frequency Sweep below
field rotation: 0.5 to 70 s

6.1.5 Interference - Dipole Vector

type: automatic, manual rotation


carrier frequency: 3 600 to 10 000 Hz
AMF: 0 to 200 Hz
Spectrum: 0 to 200 Hz
frequency sweep: see Frequency Sweep below
dipole rotation: from 3 rev. per second to 1 rev. per 30 seconds (auto-rotation)

page 21 of 29
ELECTROTHERAPY – USER‘S GUIDE

6.1.6 Russian Stimulation

carrier frequency: 2 500 to 10 000 Hz


pulse frequency: 40 to 150 Hz
pulse/pause ratio: 1:1 to 1:8 (exception; otherwise the pulse/period ratio is used)
modulation: trapezoid surges
(for parameters see Modulation of currents below)

6.1.7 Mid-frequency Surges (Amplitude-modulated)

carrier frequency: 2 500 to 10 000 Hz


pulse: 0.1 to 50 ms (depending on the set carrier frequency)
pulse frequency: 9.8 to 1 000 Hz (depending on the set carrier frequency)
modulation: see Modulation of Currents below

6.1.8 Rectangular Pulses

type: monophasic, symmetric, alternating


pulse: 0.2 to 1 000 ms
pause: 0.1 to 10 000 ms (monophasic, symmetric; then by the pulse length)
0.1 to 5 000 ms (alternating; then by the pulse length)
frequency: 0.1 to 1 000 Hz
modulation: see Modulation of Currents below

6.1.9 Triangular Pulses

type: monophasic, symmetric, alternating


pulse: 1 to 1 000 ms
pause: 0.1 to 10 000 ms (monophasic, symmetric; then by the pulse length)
0.1 to 5 000 ms (alternating; then by the pulse length)
frequency: 0.1 to 900 Hz (monophasic)
0.1 to 450 Hz (symmetric, alternating)
modulation: see Modulation of Currents below

6.1.10 Exponential Pulses, Pulses with Exponential Rise

type: monophasic, symmetric, alternating


pulse: 1 to 800 ms
pause: 0.1 to 10 000 ms (monophasic, symmetric; then by the pulse length)
0.1 to 5 000 ms (alternating; then by the pulse length)
frequency: 0.1 to 900 Hz (monophasic)
0.1 to 450 Hz (symmetric, alternating)
modulation: see Modulation of Currents below

page 22 of 29
ELECTROTHERAPY – USER‘S GUIDE

6.1.11 Combined Pulses

type: asymmetric
pulse: 0.2 to 1 000 ms
pause: 0.5 to 10 000 ms (depending on the pulse length)
frequency: 0.1 to 550 Hz
modulation: see Modulation of Currents below

6.1.12 Stimulation Pulses


(for Stimulations according to Electrodiagnostics)

type: rectangular, triangular (monophasic)


pulse: 0.1 to 1 000 ms
pause: 0.5 to 10 s
pulse generation sound selection: no (beep depending on the pulse length)

6.1.13 Interrupted Pulses

type:
rectangular, triangular (monophasic, symmetric, alternating)
interruption frequency:8 000 Hz, duty factor 95 %
pulse:
1 to 30 ms
pause:1 to 60 ms (monophasic)
1 to 30 ms (symmetric, alternating)
frequency: 11.1 to 500 Hz (monophasic)
11.1 to 333 Hz (symmetric)
8.3 to 250 Hz (alternating)
modulation: see Modulation of Currents below

6.1.14 Träbert, Ultra-Reiz 2-5

type: monophasic
pulse: 2 ms
pause: 5 ms
frequency: 143 Hz
modulation: see Modulation of Currents below

6.1.15 Leduc

type: monophasic
pulse: 1 ms
pause: 9 ms
frequency: 100 Hz
modulation: see Modulation of Currents below

page 23 of 29
ELECTROTHERAPY – USER‘S GUIDE

6.1.16 Faradic, Neofaradic

type: monophasic rectangular (faradic), monophasic triangular


(neofaradic)
pulse: 2 ms
pause: 20 ms
frequency: 45.5 Hz
modulation: see Modulation of Currents below

6.1.17 H-wave

type: symmetric
pulse: 2 x 5.6 ms
pause: 0.22 to 10 000 ms
frequency: 0.1 to 87.7 Hz
modulation: see Modulation of Currents below

6.1.18 Diadynamics

type: DF, MF, CP, LP, RS, CP-ISO


base: 0 / 0.5 / 1 / 2 / 5 / 10 %
basic frequency: 50 or 60 Hz (from these frequencies the currents were derived)
pulse interruption: 8 000 Hz, duty factor 95 %

parameters of DF type*: continuous sine pulses, frequency 100 Hz


DF

parameters of MF type*: continuous sine pulses, frequency 50 Hz


MF

parameters of CP type*: alternation of DF and MF: 1 second DF, 1 second MF


CP

parameters of LP type*: alternation of modulated DF (10 seconds) and MF (6 seconds)


LP

parameters of RS type*: alternation of MF and pause: 1 second MF, 1 second pause


RS

parameters of CP-ISO type*: alternation of DF and MF with the amplitude 80 % of DF:


1 second DF, 1 second MF
CP-
ISO

* the parameters are defined for the basic pulse frequency 50 Hz

page 24 of 29
ELECTROTHERAPY – USER‘S GUIDE

6.1.19 Galvanic Current (Iontophoretic)

type: continuous, interrupted by 8 000 Hz with duty factor 95 %

6.1.20 Microcurrents
type: rectangular, triangular, exponential (monophasic, symmetric,
alternating) and combined
pulse: 0.2 to 1 000 ms (rectangular, combined)
1 to 1 000 ms (other)
pause: 0.1 to 10 000 ms (monophasic, symmetric, combined; then by the
pulse length)
0.1 to 5 000 ms (alternating; then by the pulse length)
frequency: 0.1 to 1 000 Hz (rectangular)
0.1 to 700 Hz (combined)
0.1 to 900 Hz (other, monophasic)
0.1 to 450 Hz (other, symmetric a alternating)
modulation: see Modulation of Currents below
note: CC mode only

6.1.21 Spastic Stimulations (according to Hufschmidt)

pulses: 0.1 to 25 ms
delay between channels: 10 to 3 000 ms
frequency: 0.15 to 50 Hz (depending on the set pulse length and delay)

6.1.22 High-voltage Therapy (HVT)

type: single-peak, double-peak, triple-peak pulses


symmetric, alternating
pulse: 20 µs (pulses: single, symmetric, alternating)
30 µs (double-peak pulses)
40 µs (triple-peak pulses)
frequency: 0.1 to 500 Hz
modulation: see Modulation of Currents below
note: CV mode only

page 25 of 29
ELECTROTHERAPY – USER‘S GUIDE

6.2 MODULATION OF CURRENTS

Types: constant frequency


random frequency
burst
sine surges
trapezoid surges
symmetric surges

Random frequency: standard ± 30 %


Burst (not designed for HVT):
number of bursts in a pulse: 3 to 10
frequency of bursts: 0.1 to 100 Hz (depending on length and freq. of pulses)
Sine surges:
surge length : 0.15 to 35 s (for HVT from 3 to 35 s)
pause length : 0.02 to 70 s (for HVT from 3 to 70 s)
Trapezoid surges:
rise, fall: 1 to 35 s (for HVT from 3 to 35 s)
time of stimulation, pause between surges: 1 to 35 s (for HVT from 3 to 35 s)
Symmetric surges:
sweep time: 1 to 35 s (for HVT from 3 to 35 s)
contour: 1 to 99 %

6.3 FREQUENCY SWEEP (INTERFERENCE)

types: continuous, jump, symmetric

Random selection of frequency at sweep: yes/no


Continuous sweep:
frequency rise and fall: 1 to 35 s
frequency hold: 0 to 35 s
Jump sweep:
frequency hold: 1 to 35 s
Symmetric sweep:
sweep time: 1 to 35 s
contour: 1 to 99 %

6.4 STEPS OF SETTING OF PARAMETERS

Steps of setting the parameters of currents*


0.10 to 0.30: 0.01
0.30 to 1.00: 0.05
1.00 to 3.00: 0.10
3.00 to 10.0: 0.5
10.0 to 30.0: 1.0
30.0 to 100: 5
100 to 300: 10
300 to 1 000: 50
1 000 to 3 000: 100
3 000 to 10 000: 500

* applies for all settings except carrier frequency:


2 500 to 5 000: 100
5 000 to 10 000: 500

page 26 of 29
ELECTROTHERAPY – USER‘S GUIDE

6.5 MAXIMUM INTENSITY VALUES

TENS:
10 µs to 160 µs 140 mA
161 µs to 400 µs 140 mA (for additional limits see the table)

pulse : pause frequency 0.1 – 400 Hz frequency above 400 Hz


100 : 1 50 mA 80 mA
10 : 1 52 mA 83 mA
5:1 54 mA 87 mA
2:1 61 mA 97 mA
1:1 70 mA 113 mA
1:2 86 mA 138 mA
1:3 100 mA 140 mA
1:5 122 mA 140 mA
1:7 140 mA 140 mA
1 : 10 to 1 : 10 000 140 mA 140 mA

2-pole interference: 140 mA

4-pole interference: 100 mA

Isoplanar interference: 100 mA

Dipole interference: 100 mA

Russian stimulation: 140 mA

Diadynamics: DF 70 mA
MF 100 mA
CP 80 mA
LP 80 mA
RS 100 mA
CP-ISO 80 mA

Rectangular pulses, combined pulses, interrupted rectangular pulses:


0.2 ms to 29 ms 140 mA (for additional limits see the table)*
30 ms to 49 ms 110 mA (for additional limits see the table)*
50 ms to 69 ms 90 mA (for additional limits see the table)*
70 ms to 99 ms 80 mA (for additional limits see the table)*
100 ms to 299 ms 70 mA (for additional limits see the table)*
300 ms to 1000 ms 65 mA (for additional limits see the table)*

pulse : pause frequency 0.1 – 400 Hz frequency above 400 Hz


100 : 1 50 mA 80 mA
10 : 1 52 mA 83 mA
5:1 54 mA 87 mA
2:1 61 mA 97 mA
1:1 70 mA 113 mA
1:2 86 mA 138 mA
1:3 100 mA 140 mA
1:5 122 mA 140 mA
1:7 140 mA 140 mA
1 : 10 to 1 : 10 000 140 mA 140 mA
* always the lower value is valid

page 27 of 29
ELECTROTHERAPY – USER‘S GUIDE

Triangular pulses, interrupted triangular pulses:


1 ms to 29 ms 140 mA (for additional limits see the table)*
30 ms to 49 ms 110 mA (for additional limits see the table)*
50 ms to 69 ms 90 mA (for additional limits see the table)*
70 ms to 99 ms 80 mA (for additional limits see the table)*
100 ms to 299 ms 70 mA (for additional limits see the table)*
300 ms to 1000 ms 65 mA (for additional limits see the table)*

pulse : pause frequency 0.1 – 400 Hz frequency above 400 Hz


100 : 1 71 mA 113 mA
10 : 1 74 mA 118 mA
5:1 77 mA 123 mA
2:1 86 mA 138 mA
1:1 100 mA 140 mA
1:2 122 mA 140 mA
1 : 3 to 1 : 10 000 140 mA 140 mA
* always the lower value is valid

Exponential pulses, pulses with exponential rise, interrupted exponential pulses:


1 ms to 29 ms 140 mA (for additional limits see the table)*
30 ms to 49 ms 110 mA (for additional limits see the table)*
50 ms to 69 ms 90 mA (for additional limits see the table)*
70 ms to 99 ms 80 mA (for additional limits see the table)*
100 ms to 299 ms 70 mA (for additional limits see the table)*
300 ms to 800 ms 65 mA (for additional limits see the table)*

pulse : pause frequency 0.1 – 400 Hz frequency above 400 Hz


100 : 1 87 mA 138 mA
10 : 1 90 mA 140 mA
5:1 94 mA 140 mA
2:1 106 mA 140 mA
1:1 122 mA 140 mA
1 : 2 to 1 : 10 000 140 mA 140 mA
* always the lower value is valid

Stimulation pulses:
0.1 ms to 29 ms 140 mA (for additional limits see the table)*
30 ms to 49 ms 110 mA (for additional limits see the table)*
50 ms to 69 ms 90 mA (for additional limits see the table)*
70 ms to 99 ms 80 mA (for additional limits see the table)*
100 ms to 299 ms 70 mA (for additional limits see the table)*
300 ms to 1000 ms 65 mA (for additional limits see the table)*

Träbert current (Ultra-Reiz): 92 mA

Leduc current: 140 mA

Faradic current: 140 mA

Neofaradic current: 140 mA

Galvanic current: 65 mA

page 28 of 29
ELECTROTHERAPY – USER‘S GUIDE

H – wave:
frequency intensity
0.1 – 35 Hz 140 mA
40 Hz 129 mA
50 Hz 114 mA
60 Hz 103 mA
80 Hz 90 mA
88 Hz 86 mA

Microcurrents: 1000 µA

Spastic stimulation: 140 mA

HVT: 390 V

page 29 of 29
BTL-4000
Ultrasound
Therapy
USER'S GUIDE

v100z1TN21/06/2004EN
ULTRASOUND THERAPY – USER'S GUIDE

CONTENTS:

1 USER'S GUIDE ...................................................................................................................................................3


1.1 Mechanism of Action......................................................................................................................................3
1.2 Methods of Application...................................................................................................................................4
1.2.1 According to Application Area and Movement of the Emitter Head ..........................................................4
1.2.2 According to Application Area ..................................................................................................................5
1.2.3 According to Contact Between Emitter Head and Body Surface ..............................................................5
1.3 Ultrasound Frequency....................................................................................................................................5
1.4 Modes of Operation........................................................................................................................................5
1.5 Emitter Head Size ..........................................................................................................................................6
1.6 Application Time.............................................................................................................................................6
1.7 Intensity..........................................................................................................................................................6
1.8 Frequency of Treatments ...............................................................................................................................6
1.9 Combined Therapy.........................................................................................................................................6
1.9.1 Ultrasound + Low-frequency Currents......................................................................................................6
1.9.1.1 Mechanism of Action ..........................................................................................................................7
1.9.1.2 Intensity ..............................................................................................................................................7
1.9.2 Ultrasound + Amplitude Modulated Mid-frequency Currents (2-pole Interference)...................................7
1.9.2.1 Mechanism of Action ..........................................................................................................................7
1.9.2.2 Intensity ..............................................................................................................................................7
1.9.3 Ultrasound + TENS (Transcutaneous Electrical Nerve Stimulation).........................................................8
1.9.3.1 Mechanism of Action ..........................................................................................................................8
1.9.3.2 Intensity ..............................................................................................................................................8
1.10 Specific Contraindications for Ultrasound Therapy ........................................................................................8
1.10.1 Absolute ...................................................................................................................................................8
1.10.2 Relative ....................................................................................................................................................9
1.11 Therapy Prescription ....................................................................................................................................10
1.12 Instructions for the Patient ...........................................................................................................................10
1.13 Treatment Procedure ...................................................................................................................................10
2 SETUP OF ULTRASOUND GENERATOR.......................................................................................................11
2.1 Setup and Control of Ultrasound Therapy....................................................................................................11
2.1.1 Ultrasound ..............................................................................................................................................11
2.1.1.1 Carrier Frequency.............................................................................................................................11
2.1.1.2 Duty Factor .......................................................................................................................................11
2.1.1.3 Intensity ............................................................................................................................................11
2.1.1.4 Time..................................................................................................................................................11
2.1.1.5 Pulse Frequency...............................................................................................................................11
2.1.1.6 With Electro yes/no...........................................................................................................................11
2.1.1.7 Course of Signal ...............................................................................................................................12
2.1.1.8 Physiological Effects .........................................................................................................................12
2.1.2 Ultrasound Sequence .............................................................................................................................12
2.2 Specific Settings...........................................................................................................................................12
2.2.1 Ultrasound Head Calibration ..................................................................................................................12
2.2.1.1 Start of Calibration ............................................................................................................................12
2.2.1.2 Finishing of Calibration .....................................................................................................................13
2.2.1.3 Saving of Calibration Values.............................................................................................................13
3 TECHNICAL PARAMETERS ............................................................................................................................14
3.1 Parameters of Ultrasound Generator ...........................................................................................................14
3.2 Step of Setting of the Adjustable Values ......................................................................................................14
3.3 Parameters of Ultrasound Heads .................................................................................................................15
4 ACCESSORIES.................................................................................................................................................16

page 2 of 16
ULTRASOUND THERAPY – USER'S GUIDE

1 USER'S GUIDE

Continuing education is a very important aspect of healthcare delivery. Many excellent resources are today available
to expand a user's knowledge about many aspects of ultrasound therapy. BTL recommends a thorough review of this
guide prior to operating the equipment and a search of educational reading material on the internet.

1.1 MECHANISM OF ACTION

Mechanical waves of a frequency higher than 20 000 Hz are called ultrasound. Application of ultrasound does not
generate any electric current in tissues, and thus it is classified as mechanotherapy. The frequency usually used in
physiotherapy is 0.8 – 3 MHz.
When the air gap between the emitter head and the body surface is eliminated, the emitter head vibrations are
transmitted into the tissue and propagate to the depth in the form of longitudinal waves. All cells in the path of
ultrasonic beam begin to oscillate. This causes micro-massage followed by transformation of gel into sol (jelly
structures become liquid), transformation of mechanic energy into thermal, and deep warming of tissues.
The amount of generated heat depends on the amount of absorbed energy. Other effects of ultrasound (degassing of
solutions, formation of cavities in liquids, and local alkalization) are negligible with ultrasound doses and intensities
used in physical therapy.
In order to avoid side effects, it is important to realize that molecular oscillation occurs not only in the path of ultrasonic
beam, but also in places that are distant from the area of application as a result of transmission by body fluids. This
may lead to restoration of former epistaxis or acceleration of menstruation.
The features of ultrasound beam and its distance from the emitter head determine the ultrasound field as being either
close or distant.
Close ultrasound field is characterized by low beam divergence and big intensity variations due to interferential
effects. The length of close field is directly proportional to effective radiation area (ERA – see below) of the emitter
head and inversely proportional to frequency. For example, the length of close field with 4 cm2 ERA emitter head and
1 MHz frequency is approximately 10 cm, and for the emitter head with 1 cm2 ERA and 1 MHz frequency it is
approximately 2 cm.
Distant ultrasonic field is characterized by increasing beam divergence, gradual decrease of intensity, and almost
no interferential effects.
Therapeutic effects take place mainly in the close field. The ultrasonic beam in the close field has significant
interferential effects (interference of applied and reflected waves) - both constructive and destructive. It results in non-
homogenous ultrasonic beam where peak levels of intensity (local increase of intensity caused by constructive
interference) may be many times higher than the pre-set value.
Beam Non-uniformity Ratio (BNR) states how many times the peaks of intensity exceed the pre-set values. This
value characterizes an ultrasound head with a given frequency. The BNR value of a good quality ultrasound head is
lower than 5. It means that if the pre-set intensity of the unit is 1 W/cm2, the intensity in any part of the ultrasonic beam
2
is not higher than 5 W/cm .
The BNR of older ultrasound heads and some newer ones (some manufacturers do not mention the BNR
value) is often 20 or even more!
The Effective Radiating Area (ERA) is always smaller than the actual surface area of the emitter head (the ERA is
determined by the size of the piezoelectric crystal or ceramic table that generates ultrasound by oscillating). The
ultrasound dose (power emitted to a surface area) is, therefore, related to the ERA and not to the actual surface area
of the emitter head.
The phenomena of ultrasound refraction and reflection are caused by ultrasound wave transmission from one
tissue into another and by different transmission speed in these tissues. When applying ultrasound, it is necessary to
eliminate the air gap between the emitter head and the skin. Therefore, modern ultrasound heads have built-in optic
and/or acoustic check of insufficient contact, possibly with automatic termination of application time countdown.

page 3 of 16
ULTRASOUND THERAPY – USER'S GUIDE

Due to interference in the close ultrasound field (it reaches the highest level in the place of soft tissue/bone boundary -
up to 35%), ultrasonic beam power increases (constructive interference) or decreases (destructive interference).
In order to avoid tissue lesions at peak levels of intensity, it is necessary to move the emitter head continuously.
As a result of reflection and constructive interference, local increase in intensity and temperature may occur,
particularly in the place of periosteum/bone boundary. This increase can lead to periosteum pain during ultrasound
application. If this occurs, the intensity must be immediately lowered.
Ultrasound is primarily absorbed in deeper tissues. Since these tissues usually do not include thermoreceptors, it is
impossible to perceive local rise in temperature. The patient feels pain only if the local temperature exceeds 45oC and
o
nociceptive receptors are irritated. Most authors agree that a short-term rise in local temperature to 45 C is not
dangerous.
In the area of classic inflammation (edema, erythema, local rise in temperature, pain or dysfunction) additional heat
production is contraindicated, and thus only pulsed ultrasound (athermic) can be applied if necessary.
During peracute phase of post-traumatic conditions (up to 24-36 hours) the pulsed ultrasound application is
contraindicated (vibrations hinder capillary proliferation and may cause delayed bleeding).

Local rise in temperature and micro-massage have several physiological effects:


• Improvement of local circulation and thus also metabolism. Rise in temperature enhances vasodilatation
(more evident in continuous ultrasound).
• Increase in capillary permeability and increased resorption of extravasation fluid.
• Improvement of local circulation and decrease in orthosympathetic activity resulting in significant muscle
relaxation.
• Decrease in local ischaemia pain.
• Transformation of gel into sol (due to transformation of fibrinogen into fibrin, haematomas and edemas change
into gel; ultrasound dissolves this gel and speeds up resorption). As the transformation of fibrinogen into fibrin is a
basis of healing process (scar formation), it is not advisable to apply ultrasound for peracute post-traumatic
conditions.
• Improvement of tissue regeneration capabilities as a result of the above-mentioned effects.
Ultrasound has also several non-therapeutic effects that can have negative impact, such as:
• Tissue lesion - Mechanic and/or thermic tissue lesion can occur when the intensity is too high. Especially
sensitive is the nervous system (peripheral nerve) situated right on the bone (interference!) below the
surface (close field!). Impulse transmission speed in the corresponding nerve decelerates, then occurs
total (reversible) impulse transmission blockage and finally irreversible disintegration of the neuron
(myelin coats are preserved). Therefore be extremely cautious when applying ultrasound e.g. on
paravertebral muscles after laminectomy when nerve structures lose their natural bone protection.
Similarly, bone projections located just under the skin (ankles, epicondyles, spondyle spines, etc.) are
also sensitive.
• Leukocyte mobility impairment – this can be minimized by sufficient movement of the emitter head.
• Other effects (mainly caused by overdosage) are: decrease in glycaemia, increased fatigue, nervousness,
changes in appetite, constipation, increased tendency to catch colds.

1.2 METHODS OF APPLICATION

1.2.1 According to Application Area and Movement of the


Emitter Head

Static application - The head is fixed to the treated area by a special holder and it is not moved. Due to the
above-mentioned adverse effects it is the least suitable form of application.
Semistatic application - is used when the application area corresponds to the ERA of the emitter head. The
therapist continuously moves the emitter head, in spiral along the perimeter of an imaginary circle.
Dynamic application - the application area is bigger than the ERA of the emitter head. The therapist moves
the emitter head in spirals in the treatment area. The application time is prolonged proportionally according to
how many times is the application area bigger than the ERA of the head.

page 4 of 16
ULTRASOUND THERAPY – USER'S GUIDE

1.2.2 According to Application Area

Local application - Ultrasound is applied to the affected area. It is the most common way of application,
particularly suitable for local muscle spasms, chronic post-traumatic edemas, etc.
Segmental application - Ultrasound is applied to the outflows of nerve radices of the affected area (e.g.
Sudeck syndrome, Morbus Reynauld, etc. The application is paravertebral and homolateral; in the area of C5
- Th1 for pathologies of upper limbs and in the L3 - S1 area for lower limbs.
Neural application - is based on the effect of decrease in impulse transmission speed in the peripheral
nerve where ultrasound is applied. As the dividing line between the lowering of conductivity and irreversible
nerve damage (asymptomatic) is very small, this method of application is considered dangerous, and it is
used only exceptionally (e.g., phantom pain).
Radicular application - Ultrasound is applied subsequently to the corresponding spinal root and manifested
Head zone. For application above the spinal root, the same risks and limitations apply as for neural
application.

1.2.3 According to Contact Between Emitter Head and Body


Surface

Direct contact - is provided by a contact medium (ultrasound gel). This is a common way of ultrasound
application, and it is not necessary to mention it in ultrasound therapy prescription. For combined therapy
(ultrasound + electrotherapy) it is recommended to write "conductive gel" in the prescription because some
gels do not conduct electricity. The BTL ultrasound gel is conductive; if this gel is not available you can use
ECG gel or another water-based gel instead. However, never use paraffin oil, because it is non-conductive
and could damage the head.
Subaqual application. This method has a range of advantages: It uses mainly the distant ultrasound field
where interference does not occur. Furthermore, there is no need to press the emitter head against the skin
in order to maintain sufficient contact (this pressure is unpleasant or even painful for post-traumatic
conditions). In addition, this application is not limited by uneven surfaces, and ultrasound can be easily
applied to these surfaces, such as to interphalangeal joints.
Disadvantages of subaqual application include difficult handling of a special porcelain bath, limitation of
ultrasound application to acral body parts, and the risk of the therapist's hand lesions if the hand is put in
water. (It is strictly prohibited due to reflection and interference of ultrasonic waves against walls of the
porcelain bath!) Some emitter heads (even newer) are claimed to be water resistant, but if they do not have a
holder, they do not provide safe subaqual ultrasound application.
Ultrasound can be also applied via a thin-walled rubber bag (surgical gloves, condom) filled with boiled water.
However, when using this method, it is necessary to eliminate the air gap between the bag and skin (use gel)
and between the emitter head and the bag. This method is often perceived as very time-consuming.

1.3 ULTRASOUND FREQUENCY

Older ultrasound units employ a fixed frequency, usually 0.8 – 1 MHz. Newer ones are multifrequency units, the
selected frequency is determined by the target tissue; 1 MHz frequency is used for deep tissues and 3 MHz frequency
for superficial tissues.

1.4 MODES OF OPERATION

a) continuous - It is characterized by heat generated deeply in tissues. It is contraindicated in inflamed areas


and everywhere else where local warming is undesirable.
b) pulsed - together with shortening of pulse length there occurs decrease in so called Duty factor. As a result,
thermic effect is suppressed and when Duty factor is below 12.5% (1:8), athermic effect can be expected.
Duty factor (DF) can be set in pulsed mode of operation. Its value states for how many percent of the period duration
the ultrasound signal is being generated. When setting therapy parameters of BTL units, the ratio of ultrasound signal
duration to the period length is stated in brackets. This ratio is used in parameters of recommended ultrasound
therapies of BTL units. In case of continuous setting of the parameter, only the percentage expression is used.
Example:
Duty factor 25% (1:4) means that 25% (1/4) of the period is ultrasound and the rest of the period is pause.

page 5 of 16
ULTRASOUND THERAPY – USER'S GUIDE

The same example, more detailed:


With a pulse frequency of 100 Hz the period is 10ms long. With DF set to 25% (1:4), pulse duration is 2.5 ms
and pause is 7.5 ms.

1.5 EMITTER HEAD SIZE

2 2
The size of the emitter head is determined by the Effective Radiating Area (ERA): 1 cm (small head) and 4 cm
(medium head, or big head according to some manufacturers). The choice of the head depends on the size of the
application area. Ultrasound application to large areas by a small head is too time-consuming, difficult for the
therapist, and the dose is not applied homogeneously.
2
Small heads with ERA about 1 cm are used for trigger points, scars or for small and uneven surfaces where with an
emitter head of standard size the ultrasound would have to be applied subaqually.

1.6 APPLICATION TIME

Application time varies and largely depends on the stage of disease. For acute conditions, it is 3 minutes at the
beginning; for chronic conditions, it is usually 5 minutes at the beginning, and then it is prolonged using the positive
step method. Application time for most therapies does not exceed 10 minutes. If the application area is x-times larger
than the ERA of the head, application time has to be x-times prolonged and dynamic application is used.

1.7 INTENSITY

For acute conditions start with the intensity of 0.5 W/cm2 (in some cases even lower: e.g., in case of trismus, 0.2
2
W/cm on hypertonic fibres of m. temporalis. The muscle is situated on the bone, just below the surface. Since the
close ultrasound field is used, apply very low intensity.)
For chronic conditions, the intensity of 0.8 - 1.0 W/cm2 is used initially and it is increased according to the patient's
reaction (the positive step method). The ultrasound intensity must not exceed 2.0 W/cm2 in continuous mode and 3.0
2
W/cm in pulse mode.

It is not recommended to increase in steps two parameters at the same time - if you extend application area,
do not increase intensity, and vice versa.

1.8 FREQUENCY OF TREATMENTS

Recommended frequency of treatments for acute conditions is 5 times a week and for chronic conditions 3 times a
week. It is advisable to change frequency during one set of treatments (for example, 3 times a day, then 3 times every
other day).
The total number of treatments varies according to the individual condition. It can range from a single application
before myoskeletal surgery up to 9 applications over a 3-week period for chronic conditions.

1.9 COMBINED THERAPY

Combined therapy is simultaneous application of two or more kinds of energy. (Common diadynamic currents with
simultaneous application of galvanic and pulse low frequency currents can be also considered as combined therapy.)
Typical combinations are:
- ultrasound + low-frequency currents
- ultrasound + amplitude-modulated mid-frequency currents
- ultrasound + TENS
For combined therapy we recommend using of CV mode of electrotherapy.

1.9.1 Ultrasound + Low-frequency Currents


This combination can be applied by using one BTL Combi unit (for example, BTL-5810 S Combi) or by interconnection
of two single units (BTL-4000 Sono and BTL-4000 Puls) The current with adjustable intensity is brought to the

page 6 of 16
ULTRASOUND THERAPY – USER'S GUIDE

covering metallic plate of the emitter head. The other electrode (most usually a plate electrode) is placed
contralaterally, so that both the ultrasound field and low-frequency currents are brought to the treatment area.

1.9.1.1 Mechanism of Action


When using appropriate low-frequency current (100 – 200 Hz), myorelaxation effect of the ultrasound is cumulatively
increased. This form of combined therapy (when using ultrasound of the frequency 3 MHz) is used especially for
treating localized muscle hypertonia, uncoordinated muscle fibres (unable of spontaneous relaxation), and trigger
points in superficially located muscles.

A certain disadvantage of this combination is a galvanic (corrosion) effect. It applies especially to diadynamic currents
and to a certain extent also to monophasic pulse currents. This effect is more evident on the emitter head than on the
skin. However, when using higher intensities, it is important to be aware of this effect and ensure the patient’s safety.

1.9.1.2 Intensity
2 2
The intensity of ultrasound set separately - 0.5 - 0.7 W/cm for continuous ultrasound and up to 1.0 W/cm for pulsed
ultrasound with Duty factor 1:2 or more. The intensity of the low-frequency component is set according to the aim.

When locating trigger points, set the intensity at threshold sensitive level outside the area of expected reflex changes
and then approach this area continuously. In the area of hyperalgesic zone, the pre-set intensity is above threshold
sensitive (up to below threshold of pain), and the patient reports subjective intensification of feelings; may even feel
pain. In the area of trigger points in a muscle, the intensity changes to threshold motor level and up to above threshold
motor level. The pre-set intensity causes a motor response. (The patient often does not notice it.) If the threshold of
pain is not reached, use the same intensity for the therapy; otherwise adjust the intensity of the low-frequency
component according to the type of current and the desired effect. (The intensity of the therapy should never be above
threshold of pain!)

The size of the indifferent plate electrode should be at least 2x (but in practice even up to 10x) larger, so that sensitive
feelings are located only on the edge of ultrasound application.

1.9.2 Ultrasound + Amplitude Modulated Mid-frequency


Currents (2-pole Interference)
Unlike the previous combination, mid-frequency currents have no galvanic effects. In addition, they are better
tolerated (at the given intensity of subjective feelings, higher current intensity can be applied), the effect is deeper, and
hence they can influence reflex changes in deep muscles.

It is obvious that for application to deeper areas lower ultrasound frequency (1 MHz) is chosen. Combination of
modern BTL units enables to select ultrasound parameters or amplitude modulation. Hence, these currents can be
used for treatment of superficial (3 MHz frequency) as well as deep (1 MHz frequency) muscles.

1.9.2.1 Mechanism of Action


is the same as for the combination ultrasound + low-frequency current (see the previous paragraph). The optimal
myorelaxation is attained with the frequency of 150-180 Hz (unlike diadynamic currents, myorelaxation effect is not
lowered by the stimulant frequency of 50 Hz - MF component of DD currents).
If you want to enhance myorelaxation of deeply located muscles by simultaneous increase in temperature, use
continuous ultrasound. On the contrary, if increase in temperature is contraindicated, use pulsed ultrasound with a
higher Duty factor (For Duty factor, see 1.4 Modes of Operation).

1.9.2.2 Intensity
2
The initial intensity for continuous ultrasound (Duty factor 1:1) is 0.4 - 0.6 W/cm , the initial intensity for pulsed
2
ultrasound with Duty factor 1:2 - 1:4 is 0.5 - 1.0 W/cm , the initial intensity for pulsed ultrasound with Duty factor 1:8 -
1:16 is 1.0 - 1.3 W/cm2.
The AMP intensity is chosen according to the desired effect. Mainly analgesic effect of amplitude modulation about
100 Hz is reached by above threshold sensitive intensity, optimal myorelaxation effect of 150 – 180 Hz modulation is
reached with the intensity at threshold motor level. The patient must not feel pain or burning sensation during
application not even in the place of hyperalgesic zone or trigger point. If pain occurs, lower the ultrasound intensity
immediately (record it to the patient’s card and send the patient to his/her physician for immediate check-up). In order
to eliminate burning sensation in the trigger point area, lower the intensity of mid-frequency component or add the
contact medium. (It is not necessary to inform the patient’s physician.)

page 7 of 16
ULTRASOUND THERAPY – USER'S GUIDE

1.9.3 Ultrasound + TENS


(Transcutaneous Electrical Nerve Stimulation)
In the above-mentioned combinations, the emphasis is put on myorelaxation, therapy of hyperalgesic zones and
trigger points. In the combination of Ultrasound + TENS, the expected effect is generally analgesic., i.e. it is used not
only for treatment of the above-mentioned reflex change areas, but also for other kinds of pain. It is important to keep
in mind mechanisms of ultrasound treatment because not every type of pain can be treated by ultrasound. This
combination is especially suitable for myalgia (post-stress, reflexive, etc.) and post-traumatic pain (after per-acute
condition; 24-36 hours after onset), during lege artis general therapy (relaxation, etc.).
The preferable TENS pulses are asymmetric, biphasic programs beginning with the numbers 12, 15, 18 (The
stimulant effect of the ultrasound head/cathode is preserved and at the same time the galvanic effect is eliminated).
The continuous (or possibly random) frequency of 100 Hz is used.
The effect of this combination is better than the effect of the same treatments applied subsequently. It is necessary to
be aware of all ultrasound contraindications (see 1.10 Specific Contraindications for Ultrasound Therapy).

1.9.3.1 Mechanism of Action


Reduction in the perception of pain positively affects the trophics of the injured area. The simultaneous application of
ultrasound with consequent increase in capillary permeability, improved extravasal liquid absorption and thus
reduction of pressure, increased vasoactive amines secretion, and direct effect on the precapillary sphincters are the
best prevention against algodystrophic syndrome. Please note that beginning with the earliest clinical symptoms of
algodystrophy, the application of any physical therapy to the porotic area is contraindicated, and only segmental
technique can be used (for example, ultrasound + electrotherapy applied paravertebrally, homolaterally on the
segmental level, innervating the porotic area).

1.9.3.2 Intensity
For the ultrasound intensity please see the previous section. Intensity of TENS is above threshold sensitive outside
the area of reflex changes and above threshold motor level in the area of reflex changes.

1.10 SPECIFIC CONTRAINDICATIONS FOR ULTRASOUND THERAPY

1.10.1 Absolute
- epiphyses of growing bones
There is the risk of irreversible damage of the growth zone, deformity and permanent impairment. Since older
types of ultrasound units employed low intensity (displayed data did not correspond with the actual energy
applied), the damage of the growth zones was exceptional and many physicians did not take this
contraindication too seriously. However, modern, effective ultrasounds can cause damage of the growth zone,
especially due to insufficient movement of the emitter head. The responsibility lies with the physician who
prescribed the therapy as well as with the therapist who performed the contraindicated procedure.

- gonads
Small doses cause temporary and high doses permanent spermio / oogenesis impairment.

- pregnancy

- eyes
The use of special ophthalmic ultrasound units is restricted to specialised centres. In physiotherapy, it is
contraindicated.

- post-laminectomy conditions
After laminectomy, the spinal cord is not completely covered by the osseous cover, and ultrasound application
can cause temporary or event permanent paraparesis of lower extremities (if the axons of the spinal cord paths
are disorganised). This is one of the most severe damages in physiotherapy practice and the connection
between the physiotherapy application and the condition is obvious.

- bleeding with recent onset (any location)


Ultrasound waves propagate far via body fluids (though with significant energetic decrease). This can cause for
example re-occurrence of stubborn epistaxis (e.g., when the ultrasound is applied to a knee).

page 8 of 16
ULTRASOUND THERAPY – USER'S GUIDE

1.10.2 Relative
- brain, parenchymatous organs, heart
There is no reason to apply ultrasound to these organs (The brain is covered by the cranium). In spite of this,
there has been reported a case of a patient who irradiated his sinuses while he applied ultrasound to the knee
and after a few hours died of massive bleeding into his forehead lobe (calcified atheroma plate might have
been disturbed). The patient must not apply ultrasound to himself/herself under any circumstances, not even to
areas easy to reach!

- peripheral nerves (situated on the bone, just below the surface)


It mainly concerns n.ulnaris in the elbow area, volar areas of the wrist, inguines, areas under external and
internal ankles, etc.
In all of the above-mentioned areas, the constructive interference (stationary waves) results in local increase in
intensity (peaks of intensity) and thus prolongation of impulse transmission and irreversible destruction of nerve
fibres without damaging muscular fibres. Myeline covers of damaged nerves are usually preserved.

- bony projections located under the skin - spinous projections of spondyles, ankles, condyles, epicondyles
This contraindication is very often ignored. Ultrasound can be used for treatment of epicondylitis, but this is true
only in case of applying ultrasound to a specific muscular group (extensoric in lateral epicondylitis, flexoric in
ulnar epicondylitis). Direct ultrasound application to a painful attachment often causes increased pain, but it
more often leads to the process of chronification (the same effect as in the case of repeated local application of
corticosteroids).
Similarly, direct ultrasound application to spine often results in stubborn periosteum pain around spinal
projections.

- emphysema, bronchiectasis (ultrasound application to the chest area)

- menstruation
Ultrasound application is absolutely contraindicated in lower abdomen area. When applying ultrasound to other
areas, it is advisable to tell the patient that the menstruation might increase (more common is acceleration of
menstruation than metrorrhagia). If the case history shows that the ultrasound application might adversely
affect menstruation, the therapist should refuse to carry out the treatment and suggest that the patient consult
it with her physician. (It is not enough to postpone the ultrasound application after menstruating period when
ultrasound indications may not exist anymore.)

- blood circulation insufficiency

- pacemaker

- cardiovascular diseases

- cochlear implants

- metal implants

- tumours

- acute inflammations

- vascular and blood diseases (haemophilia)

- generally poor state of health

- endocrine glands

- TB

page 9 of 16
ULTRASOUND THERAPY – USER'S GUIDE

1.11 THERAPY PRESCRIPTION

Name, surname, ID number, insurance company


Diagnosis (name and number), stage
Name of treatment, type of device if possible (BTL-4000 Sono, BTL-4000 Puls + BTL-4000 Sono)
Ultrasound parameters:
frequency
duty factor
pulse frequency
intensity
emitter head size
way of application
In case of combined therapy - parameters of electrotherapy:
characteristics of current
intensity
position and size of indifferent electrode
Length of application, step
Frequency of treatments, its changes during the set of treatments
Total number of treatments
Date of check-up at the physician's
Date of prescription, physician's name, signature, stamp

1.12 INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE PATIENT

Treatment is usually asymptomatic, a feeling of moderate warmth can occur. A burning sensation during therapy
indicates insufficient contact medium (it is necessary to add more), pain indicates overdose (it is necessary to interrupt
therapy and consult the prescribed treatment with the physician; treatment with lower intensity usually continues after
one day break) or insufficient movement of the emitter head.
After the first treatment there may occur temporary worsening. Marked subjective and objective improvement should
occur not later than after the third application. If there is no improvement (in acute and subacute states), ultrasound
therapy should not be continued. Telling the patient that improvement will occur after a few months is not professional
and it shows that the physician prescribes the treatment for deferring effect (waits for self-healing processes of the
organism).
If ultrasound is used for treating chronic conditions (which is quite rare) or for change in mechanical features of treated
tissues (e.g., in case of Dupuytren's contracture or plantar aponeurosis related to calcar calcanei), significant
improvement cannot be expected after the third application. (If ultrasound application is not followed immediately by a
manual therapy, improvement cannot be expected even after the tenth application.)

1.13 TREATMENT PROCEDURE

1. Inform the patient about the procedure.


2. Never let patients apply ultrasound to themselves! It is strictly forbidden!
3. Ask the patient about contraindications that may be temporarily present – epistaxis, menstruation or pregnancy.
4. Place the patient in the proper position for the therapy and apply a contact medium.
5. Set the prescribed intensity, time, place the emitter head and switch on the ultrasound.
6. Move the emitter head continuously according to the prescribed form of application.
7. Ask the patient repeatedly about his/her feelings. In case of a burning sensation add more contact medium, and if
pain occurs, lower the intensity or interrupt the treatment and inform the physician.
8. After the prescribed time elapsed, lower the intensity and switch the unit off. (Most of modern ultrasound units do
it automatically).
9. Wipe the contact medium off the patient and dry the skin.

page 10 of 16
ULTRASOUND THERAPY – USER'S GUIDE

2 SETUP OF ULTRASOUND GENERATOR

2.1 SETUP AND CONTROL OF ULTRASOUND THERAPY

On the therapy parameters screen it is possible to select ultrasound or


ultrasound sequences.

2.1.1 Ultrasound

2.1.1.1 Carrier Frequency


Select 1 MHz or 3 MHz. The frequency 1 MHz is used for deeper located tissues.

2.1.1.2 Duty Factor


Duty factor is the percentage ratio of the pulse length to the period length (the value in the brackets states the ratio
between the pulse length and the period length). If the duty factor is set to 100% (1:1) the ultrasound works in so-
called continuous mode. In the pulse mode it is possible to select the duty factor from the following values: 6.25%
(1:16), 12.5% (1:8), 25% (1:4) and 50% (1:2). For description of finer setting of the duty factor and more detailed
description of the output signal course see 2.1.1.7.
The thermic effects of ultrasound differ according to the duty factor value. Continuous ultrasound (duty factor 100%,
i.e. 1:1) causes deep warming of tissues, while pulsed ultrasound (50% (1:2) and 25% (1:4)) has only slight thermic
effects, and for the values 12.5% (1:8) and 6.25% (1:16) the thermic effect is totally zero.

2.1.1.3 Intensity
2 2 2
Intensity can be set within the range from 0.1W/cm to 2W/cm for the continuous mode, and from 0.1W/cm to
3W/cm2 for the pulse mode.
2
If the continuous mode is set and then there is set an intensity higher than 2W/cm , the equipment sets duty factor to
2 2
50%. Similarly, if there is set an intensity from 2.1W/cm to 3W/cm and then the duty factor is set to 100%, the
2
equipment limits the intensity to 2W/cm .

2.1.1.4 Time
Time of therapy can be set within the range from 00:01 to 30:00 [min:sec].

2.1.1.5 Pulse Frequency


Pulse frequency can be selected from the following values: continuous, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110,
120, 130, 140 and 150 Hz.

2.1.1.6 With Electro yes/no


. If your unit does not contain any generator of electrotherapy, the therapy parameters manual settings screen
displays button with electro yes/no. Pressing of this button enables to connect one pole of electrotherapy from the
external connector to the case of the ultrasound head and perform combined therapy For information about
configuration of output connectors and interconnection of units see the BTL-4000 Series User's Manual. If your
device contains an electrotherapy generator this button is not displayed and one pole of electrotherapy is
automatically connected to the case of the head after starting the combined therapy.

page 11 of 16
ULTRASOUND THERAPY – USER'S GUIDE

2.1.1.7 Course of Signal


The course of signal button contains a picture informing about the shape of the modulation signal. For detailed
information about the signal and for the possibility of fine setting of the duty factor press the course of signal button.

Pulse [ms], period [ms] – information about the length of the pulse and the
period calculated for the set pulse frequency and duty factor.

Pulse freq. [Hz] – information about the set pulse frequency.

Duty factor [Hz] – by the select button it is possible to set the value from 6 to
100%. By pressing the duty factor button you can select one of the preset
values. See 2.1.1.2 Duty Factor.

2.1.1.8 Physiological Effects


The symbols of effects used in the equipment have the following meaning:

A - analgesic
E - antiedematous
F - antiphlogistic
H - hyperaemic
R - myorelaxation

2.1.2 Ultrasound Sequence


This function enables to run sequences selected by the name or number. It is
also possible to create new sequences or edit the existing ones.

Since sequence is a series of individual therapies one after another, it is


obvious that parameters of individual sections must be set when creating the
programs.
For details see chapter USER SEQUENCES in the BTL-4000 Series User's
Manual.

2.2 SPECIFIC SETTINGS

The heads delivered with the BTL-4000 devices are interchangeable. This means that the head can be connected to
any device of the BTL-4000 series which contains an ultrasound generator and it is not necessary to state the number
of the equipment for which the head is designed.
For optimum detection of the contact between the head and the patient's skin it is necessary to perform calibration of
the ultrasound head, especially for the extra purchased heads – see 2.2.1 Ultrasound Head Calibration.
The ultrasound head supplied with the equipment were calibrated during manufacturing.

2.2.1 Ultrasound Head Calibration


When calibrating the ultrasound heads the equipment measures their properties so that optimum evaluation of the
contact with the patient's skin is ensured.

2.2.1.1 Start of Calibration


Put the ultrasound head in water and press the start button. The pilot lights of
the head which is selected for calibration blink before start of calibration and
shine during calibration.

page 12 of 16
ULTRASOUND THERAPY – USER'S GUIDE

2.2.1.2 Finishing of Calibration


Take the ultrasound head out of water, dry the metal part and press the finish
button.

2.2.1.3 Saving of Calibration Values


To save the values measured during calibration of the head press the save
button.
To quit the ultrasound head calibration function press esc.

If you decide not to save the measured data (e.g. if the head was not immersed in water after the start of calibration)
press the esc button to refuse saving.

After end of calibration start therapy for 1 MHz and 3 MHz (e.g. with the intensity 1 W/cm2) and put the head in water
and out of it several times, to check the correctness of contact detection.

ATTENTION!
If the prescribed procedure of ultrasound head calibration is not followed, there may occur damage to the
ultrasound generator and the ultrasound head after the start of therapy.

page 13 of 16
ULTRASOUND THERAPY – USER'S GUIDE

3 TECHNICAL PARAMETERS

3.1 PARAMETERS OF ULTRASOUND GENERATOR

Effective intensity
Continuous operation 0.1 to 2W/cm2 ± 20% for the output intensity higher than 0.2W/cm2
Pulse operation 0.1 to 3W/cm2 ± 20% for the output intensity higher than 0.2W/cm2
Working frequency 1 MHz ± 5% and 3.2 MHz ± 5%
Modulation frequency 10 to 150 Hz ± 5%
Duty factor 6 to 100% ± 5% of the set value
Duty factor – defaults 6.25% (1:16), 12.5% (1:8), 25% (1:4), 50% (1:2), 100% (1:1) ± 5% of the
set value
Time of therapy 0 to 30 minutes ± 2% of the set value
Maximum output power 12W

Table of pulse parameters


Frequency 10 Hz Frequency 50 Hz Frequency 100Hz Frequency 150 Hz
Duty period 100 ms period 20 ms period 10 ms period 6.67 ms
factor Pulse Pause Pulse Pause Pulse Pause Pulse Pause
length length length length length length length length
50 % 50 ms 50 ms 10 ms 10 ms 5 ms 5 ms 3.33 ms 3.33 ms
25% 25 ms 75 ms 5 ms 15 ms 2.5 ms 7.5 ms 1.67 ms 5 ms
10% 10 ms 90 ms 2 ms 18 ms 1 ms 9 ms 0.67 ms 6 ms
6% 6 ms 94 ms 1.2 ms 18.8 ms 0.6 ms 9.4 ms 0.40 ms 6.27 ms

3.2 STEP OF SETTING OF THE ADJUSTABLE VALUES

2
Intensity 0.1 W/cm
Modulation frequency 10 Hz
Duty factor 1%
Time of therapy 1s

page 14 of 16
ULTRASOUND THERAPY – USER'S GUIDE

3.3 PARAMETERS OF ULTRASOUND HEADS

BTL-237-1-13 – small head


Effective radiation area (ERA)
ERA (EN 61689) 0.7 cm2 ± 20%
ERA (21 CFR 1050) 0.9 cm2 ± 20%
2
Maximum effective intensity 3 W/cm ± 20%
Maximum effective acoustic power 2.1 W ± 20%
Radiation frequency 1 MHz and 3.2 MHz ± 5%
Type of beam collimated
Beam non-uniformity ratio (BNR) <8
Covering grade according to EN 60 529 IP 67
BTL-237-4-13 – big head
Effective radiation area (ERA)
ERA (EN 61689) 3.2 cm2 ± 20%
ERA (21 CFR 1050) 4.4 cm2 ± 20%
Maximum effective intensity 3 W/ cm2 ± 20%
Maximum effective acoustic power 9.6 W ± 20%
Radiation frequency 1 MHz and 3.2 MHz ± 5%
Type of beam collimated
Beam non-uniformity ratio (BNR) <8
Covering grade according to EN 60 529 IP 67

page 15 of 16
ULTRASOUND THERAPY – USER'S GUIDE

4 ACCESSORIES

User's Manual
User's Guide
Head BTL-237-4-13 (large)
Head BTL-237-1-13 (small)
Holder for ultrasound head
Ultrasound gel 235ml
Ultrasound gel 5l
Ultrasound gel 10l
Touch-pen
Mains cable
Spare fuse
Markers for cables
Interconnection cable for combined therapy (PVAC.056)

page 16 of 16
BTL-4000
LASER
USER'S GUIDE

v100z1TN31/05/2004EN
LASER THERAPY – USER’S GUIDE

CONTENTS

1 USER'S GUIDE ...................................................................................................................................................3


1.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................................................................3
1.2 Light-The Principle of Laser Light and its Specifics........................................................................................3
1.3 Types of Lasers .............................................................................................................................................5
1.3.1 Source .......................................................................................................................................................5
1.3.2 Wavelength (primarily semi-conductor lasers)...........................................................................................5
1.3.3 Beam Operation Mode ..............................................................................................................................5
1.3.4 Type of Beam ............................................................................................................................................6
1.3.5 Laser Class (defined by the output)...........................................................................................................6
1.3.6 Use ............................................................................................................................................................6
1.4 Basic Physical Quantities...............................................................................................................................7
1.5 Biological Effects of a Low-power Laser (Non-invasive Laser) ......................................................................7
1.6 Acupuncture...................................................................................................................................................8
1.6.1 Frequencies for Laser Acupuncture According to Dr.Nogier .....................................................................8
1.6.2 Frequencies for Laser Acupuncture According to Dr.Voll (EAV) ...............................................................9
2 SETUP OF LASER GENERATOR....................................................................................................................10
2.1 Access Password.........................................................................................................................................10
2.2 Setup and Control of Laser Therapy ............................................................................................................10
2.2.1 Laser .......................................................................................................................................................10
2.2.1.1 Dose .................................................................................................................................................10
2.2.1.2 Frequency.........................................................................................................................................10
2.2.1.3 Output power ....................................................................................................................................11
2.2.1.4 Area ..................................................................................................................................................11
2.2.1.5 Distance between the Probe and Irradiated Surface ........................................................................12
2.2.1.6 Time of Therapy................................................................................................................................12
2.2.1.7 Course of Signal – Duty Factor (DF).................................................................................................12
2.2.1.8 Physiological Effects .........................................................................................................................13
2.2.2 Laser Sequences.....................................................................................................................................13
2.3 Specific Settings...........................................................................................................................................13
2.3.1 Door Activity ............................................................................................................................................14
2.3.2 Acupuncture ............................................................................................................................................14
2.3.3 Self-calibration of the Laser Probe ..........................................................................................................14
2.4 Locking of the Equipment If Door Opens .....................................................................................................15
2.5 Laser Probes................................................................................................................................................16
2.6 Optical Attachments .....................................................................................................................................17
2.6.1 Dental Attachment ...................................................................................................................................17
2.6.2 Gynaecological Attachment .....................................................................................................................17
2.6.3 ENT Attachment ......................................................................................................................................17
2.6.4 How to Connect the Attachment ..............................................................................................................18
2.7 Use of Safety Eyewear.................................................................................................................................18
3 APPENDIX ........................................................................................................................................................19
3.1 Warning Labels Placed on the Case of the Device and on the Laser Probe................................................19
3.1.1 Label placed on the case of the device, warning about occurrence of visible and invisible radiation of
class 3B..................................................................................................................................................19
3.1.2 Label placed on the probe, warning about proximity of aperture of laser of the stated wavelength, power
and laser class .......................................................................................................................................20
3.1.3 Label for marking of the laser workplace, warning about proximity of 3B-class laser ..............................21

page 2 of 21
LASER THERAPY – USER’S GUIDE

1 USER'S GUIDE

1.1 INTRODUCTION

This User's Guide is intended to make you familiar with the BTL-4000 Laser device designed for performing non-
invasive, low level laser therapy. At the same time, it will give you general instructions on how to perform low level
laser therapy in clinical practice.

Please note that, according to applicable legislation, the staff operating therapy lasers must be trained by competent
institutions.

1.2 LIGHT-THE PRINCIPLE OF LASER LIGHT AND ITS SPECIFICS

The nature and qualities of light can be interpreted in more ways, according to classic, relativistic or quantum physics.
However, the basic nature of light itself as either a particle/corpuscular or an electromagnetic/wave mechanism
remains unreachable for our senses and it is incomparable to any other level of reality. Therefore, we can only accept
conclusions and deductions of numerous experiments.

Laser radiation has specific qualities:


• totally monochromatic: maintaining only one wavelength

LASER 635 nm BULB

Intensity Intensity

400 500 600 700 800 nm 400 800 1200 1600 2000 nm

page 3 of 21
LASER THERAPY – USER’S GUIDE

• totally polarized – waves are absolutely spatially oriented on a defined area

Linear polarization

• totally coherent – it is absolutely oriented in time - maxima and minima of all waves are identical in time and the
waveforms are the same

Coherent light Non-coherent light

A laser beam of a high output represents the “death ray” of sci-fi authors of old; it can destroy material or matter.
However, a laser beam of low output (not exceeding 500 mW) shows slightly different effects on living organisms and
tissues, especially significant stimulative effect – see the part concerning clinical effects of low-power laser beam.

The word LASER stands for Light Amplification by Stimulated Emission of Radiation.

The first theoretical postulates on a laser beam were laid down by Albert Einstein in the early twentieth century,
describing the theoretical possibilities of a stimulated emission of light in 1916-1917. However, the first laser unit was
not constructed until 1960, following other important discoveries in the area of the so called quantum radiotechnique
(N.G. Basov and A.M. Prochorov of the former USSR and C.H. Townes of the USA received a Nobel Prize for these
discoveries in 1964).

The medical application of laser light followed soon after. At first, only high intensity laser beams were utilized. Lasers
of this type provide a source of energy that can destroy (cut, shear) as well as evaporate and, using its thermic effect,
cauterize tissue.

E. Mester, a Hungarian scientist, was the first to introduce the stimulative effect of a low intensity laser. He conducted
his experiments - which are still of a great importance - in the late sixties.

page 4 of 21
LASER THERAPY – USER’S GUIDE

1.3 TYPES OF LASERS

Lasers can be divided according to several criteria:

1.3.1 Source
• solid lasers (ruby laser)
• liquid lasers
• gas lasers - helium-neon, argon
• semi-conductor lasers (GaAs, GaAlAs) – now the most important of the non-invasive therapy lasers

The advantages of semi-conductor lasers include a significant miniaturization of the source, robustness and immunity
to damage and the theoretic possibility to construct a laser unit of any wavelength, according to the user's
requirements. Nevertheless, some lasers still remain at experimental level (see below).

1.3.2 Wavelength (primarily semi-conductor lasers)


• blue lasers – approx. 400-500 nm
• green lasers – approx.500-550
• red lasers – approx.600-700nm
• infra-red lasers – approx.700-950 nm
Visible spectrum

500nm 700nm

400nm 600nm

cosmic radiation; gamma-rays, X-rays, UV radiation infrared radiation, microwaves, radio waves, very long waves

Laser beam penetration through the tissue is largely dependent on the wavelength. In general, green and blue lasers
are still being developed and their clinical use is extremely limited. Most commonly used are the beams in the
wavelength of red light. After 2-3 mm penetration through living tissue, their intensity is reduced to half. This
predetermines red laser beams to be used especially in therapy of mucous membrane and skin diseases. Since the
output is absorbed by a very small column of the tissue, devices of an output of 50 mW or lower are usually fully
sufficient.

The intensity of infra-red lasers is reduced to half after penetration of 2-3 cm through the tissue. These lasers are
used especially in treating of deeper-located structures (joints, muscles, insertions...). Since the output is absorbed by
the column of the tissue, and since we want the intensity on the target area deep in the tissue to be sufficient, we
recommend using devices of a minimum output at least 50 mW.
See the part concerning the emitted power density below.

1.3.3 Beam Operation Mode


• pulse lasers – very short pulses – hundreds of ns, peak output in watts or tens of watts
• continuous lasers
• lasers with modulated operation – the pulse length depends on the frequency and on the duty factor; the
peak output reaches up to several hundreds of mW.

page 5 of 21
LASER THERAPY – USER’S GUIDE

Output Output
PULSE MODULATED

Mean
value
Mean
value

Time Time

Output
CONTINUOUS

Mean
value

Time

Manufacturers usually offer various alternatives, including the possibility of combination of various modes modulated
according to various parameters.
See below the parts concerning clinical effects and use.

1.3.4 Type of Beam


• convergent (point) beam
• divergent (widening) beam – allows irradiation of a larger area without the need of sweeping the probe over
the treated tissue
• laser scanners – devices for irradiation of large areas

1.3.5 Laser Class (defined by the output)


• Class 2: up to an output of 1 mW
• Class 3A (3R, 3M): up to an output of 5 mW and output density of 25 W/m2
• Class 3B: up to 500 mW

Note
The stated values are only rough, exact classification of the hygienic class is more complicated and shall be
performed according to applicable standards.

1.3.6 Use
• simple pen lasers ("laser-pen") – usually feature only a very limited range of frequency modes. The
advantage of this type is its perfect portability
• "pocket" lasers – usually designed to fit in a physician's coat pocket; in most cases the probe is connected
with the device's body by a conductor – these devices largely prevail on the market, at present the
manufacturers can equip these devices by probes of an output up to hundreds of mW
• desk-top lasers – usually supplied from the mains, the probe is connected with the device by a cable. The
advantages of this type usually include a wide range of frequency modes and the possibility to set many
different parameters. New generation devices (including BTL-4000 Laser) have also the possibility of
replacement of probes of various wavelengths and outputs. These devices are designed especially for
rehabilitation. One of their advantages is the possibility of building of "sets" of the devices which can provide
as wide range of treatments as possible on a small area.

page 6 of 21
LASER THERAPY – USER’S GUIDE

1.4 BASIC PHYSICAL QUANTITIES

• Wavelentgh - one of the basic parameters of a monochromatic laser beam (i.e. of only one wavelength). Its
unit is nanometer [nm]
• Output – its unit is mW. The given output is either peak, i.e. pulse amplitude, or mean (average). In case of
the BTL 4000 Laser the screen displays the peak output value measured on the output aperture of the probe.
Use of an optical attachment or light conductor causes approximately a 10% loss of output which shall be
deducted from the displayed value. For each attachment supplied by the manufacturer of BTL devices, the
decrease of output is stated in the attachment's technical documentation.
It is always necessary to know the output level at the active end of the probe (output aperture) – especially
when the beam is transmitted by a light conductor, the resulting output can markedly differ from the output of
the source! Every passage between media (source-air, source-lightguide, lightguide-air) lowers the output.
The mean output also depends on the chosen mode, i.e. continuous or pulse (The computing unit of the BTL-
4000 Laser takes into account the mode in which the device is working when calculating the treatment time).
• Modulation frequency – its unit is Hertz [Hz] (= number of oscillations per second), sometimes there is in
addition the percentage value of the active state time ("Duty factor") and the pulse width. The most commonly
used are numerical frequencies (5 Hz stimulation, 10 Hz analgesic effect), very common are also frequencies
according to Dr. Nogier (previously used mainly in acupuncture), frequencies according to Dr. Bahr
(nowadays used mainly in acupuncture) or according to Dr. Voll
2
• Power density - its unit is J/cm – power emitted per unit of area. This quantity is improperly called dose –
however, this term has become so common in the laser theory that also in this document the terms "emitted
power dose" or "dose" are used, but they always mean "emitted power density".

Below you can see a formula for calculation of an emitted power dose (Note: this is the dose emitted to the skin
surface, not to more deeply located structures)

mean radiation output (W) x application time (s)


emitted power dose [J/cm2] = -------------------------------------------------------------------
2
irradiated area (cm )

Knowledge of basic physical quantities (which is also acquired in obligatory training) significantly facilitates grasp of
the laser therapy.

1.5 BIOLOGICAL EFFECTS OF A LOW-POWER LASER (NON-


INVASIVE LASER)

Specific physical qualities of a laser beam result in specific clinical effects. The most considerable clinical effects are:

• analgesic effect (A)


• antiphlogistic effect (F)
• antiedematous effect (E)
• biostimulation effect (B)
• vasodilatation effect (V)

All these effects are based on positively established and verified mechanisms:
• acceleration of microcirculation
• increase of intracellular activity of many enzymes, particularly in Krebs cycle
• increased oxygen circulation, improved glucose utilization
• DNA synthesis stimulation (via phytohemaglutinin stimulation)
• increased fibroblast activity (for keloids these activated fibroblasts are able to perform resorption of fibrin)
• phagocytosis activation
• activation of the Na/K pump on the membrane
• activation of metabolic processes in the cellula: partly through the Na/K pump and Ca transport affection,
partly through direct activation of the mitochondrial system
• changes of local level of important mediators -- inflammatory (histamin substances, prostaglandins) or e.g.,
endorphins

When performing an in vitro experiment, no difference can be seen between laser beams applied in continuous and
pulse modes. However, when performing an in vivo experiment, we observe marked differences between a

page 7 of 21
LASER THERAPY – USER’S GUIDE

continuous beam and a beam adjusted to a certain defined mode. In physical therapy, this phenomenon can be
observed when performing electrotherapy or applying ultrasound. It seems that, for a complex organism with its
numerous information systems and feedbacks, a physical quantity modulated to a certain frequency features one
additional quality -- specific information transmitted by this frequency.

The effect of laser beam in acupuncture is totally specific. A laser beam affects tissue in a way fully comparable with
the effect of an inserted needle -- but without any pain or complications related to the needle insertion. The skin above
the acupuncture point is a light conductor for the laser beam. We find it interesting that in laser acupuncture, in
contrast with other forms of laser therapy, the wavelength of a laser beam is not of a big importance (however, red
lasers are slightly more effective) and the output of the device is of no importance at all (we can even use a laser-
pen). We conclude that in this method of application it is not the effect of a physical quantity itself, but the above-
mentioned transmission of information, that plays the key role.

Many treatments utilize several effects of laser light at a time (e.g. treatment of the varicose ulcer combine analgesic,
stimulative, as well as bactericidal effects).

1.6 ACUPUNCTURE

As stated above, laser beam has a specific effect on acupuncture points, adequate to use of an acupuncture needle.
The laser acupuncture has several advantages: it is non-invasive, painless (many patients report non-pleasant
sensations when acupuncture needle is being inserted), and saves time (even for sedative techniques the treatment
lasts no more than several tens of seconds).
Modulation by Nogier frequencies or EAV frequencies is very useful and it is commonly used in acupuncture.
Application of these frequencies for the most frequent diagnoses is stated below. For details see specialized literature.

1.6.1 Frequencies for Laser Acupuncture According to Dr.Nogier

Frequency [Hz] Use and Area of Application


U 1.14 Universal – whole body
A 2.28 Chaotic changes – tissues and transitional epithelium, body openings (mouth, nose,
eyes...)
B 4.56 Nutritive effect, chest and abdominal cavity
C 9.12 Mesenchyma, limbs, gluteal area, muscles and ligaments, kidneys, genitals
D 18.3 Metabolism, joints of cerebral symmetric organs
E 36.5 Nerve tissue, peripheral parts of spine, back and top parts of head and neck
F 73.0 Psychosomatic disorders, subcortical areas, lower parts of face
G 146 Emotional diseases, cerebral cortex, nervous system, frontal and temporal parts of head,
lateral parts of nose

page 8 of 21
LASER THERAPY – USER’S GUIDE

1.6.2 Frequencies for Laser Acupuncture According to Dr.Voll


(EAV)

Frequency [Hz] Use


1.20 Tachycardia
1.70 Abscess, furunculosis
1.75 Psychostimulating and sympathicotonic effect
2.20 Fatigue, lipothymia, exhaustion, restlessness, pains of legs
2.45 Haematoma, edema, excessive menstrual bleeding associated with myoma, bleeding
from varices, insomnia, vegetative disorders, sinusitis
2.50 Distortions, vegetative distrophy
2.65 Gallbladder dystonia, periostitis
2.90 Rhinitis
3.30 Arteriosclerosis, arteriosclerotic hypertension
3.50 Lithiasis, renal colic, tremor, melancholy, knee asthenia
3.60 Insomnia, excitability
3.80 All spasms, tongue burn
3.90 Neuralgia, anxiety, sleeping disorders
4.00 Pancreatic disorders, hormonal disorders, menorrhagia, headache, vertigo
4.90 Dysmenorrhea, stiff neck
5.55 Angiospasms with paresthesis
5.80 Fear, vertigo, headache
5.90 Spastic paralysis
6.00 Parasympathicotonic effect, hypertension, spasmodic stiff neck
6.30 Irritability, headache
6.80 Muscle cramps
7.50 Neuralgia n. trigemini
7.70 Spastic paralysis
8.25 Paralytic paralysis
9.20 Eczema connected with kidney secretory function disorder, hypertension with increased
diastole, renal insufficiency
9.35 Paralytic paralysis
9.40 Cystitis, prostate diseases, diseases of large intestine, bronchitis, eczema accompanying
lung and vascular diseases, gout, joint aches, stomach problems including ulcers,
paresis, varix, haemorrhoids
9.45 Angina, angina pectoris, disorders of hypophysis and gonads
9.50 Spastic hypertension, climacteric hypertension, migraine, laryngitis
9.60 Arthritis, rheumatic diseases, vertebrogenous diseases
9.70 Ischialgia, rheumatism
10.00 Phlebitis, varicose ulcer

page 9 of 21
LASER THERAPY – USER’S GUIDE

2 SETUP OF LASER GENERATOR

2.1 ACCESS PASSWORD

According to applicable standards, each laser device must be protected against unauthorized handling. In case of the
BTL-4000 series, it is guaranteed by the access password. If the device contains a laser generator, the access
password is always required after the unit is switched on. The password is preset to 0000 by the manufacturer.
After entering the correct password and confirmation by the enter button it is possible to work with the device. If an
incorrect password is entered, the device makes a warning and awaits a new entry.
The password can be changed at any time, but it cannot be disabled. For the process of password change, see
Chapter 3.2.1 Password Setting in the BTL-4000 Series USER’S MANUAL

Note
If you happen to forget your password, you can anytime use the universal one: 00000000.

2.2 SETUP AND CONTROL OF LASER THERAPY

On the therapy parameters screen it is possible to select individual laser therapies or laser sequences.

All pre-set therapy values are interconnected by the following mathematical relation:
2 2
Dose = Output * (DF/100) * Time / Area [J/cm ; W, %, s, cm ]

All pre-set values except frequency influence each other, and the device always tries to calculate the therapy
parameters in the way that the last pre-set parameter is at the value set by the user. Other parameters can be
changed, if necessary (except dose which is a key therapy parameter). Maximum values of parameters strongly
depend on the maximum power of the connected laser probe; therefore, some values can be set for the probe with the
output of 300mW but they are not allowed for the 30mW probe. When calculating therapy parameters the device tries,
if necessary, to adjust the output of the probe so that the therapy time is 1 minute.

2.2.1 Laser

2.2.1.1 Dose
This value represents the power density to the area [J/cm2]
It is a key therapy parameter – therefore its value is a fixed part of the
program (diagnosis) and the device does not change it at internal
calculations (the user can change it freely). Dose can be changed within the
range stated in the technical parameters of the device. It is the maximum
range, and in practice, with some types of probes it is not possible to reach
the upper limit because they do not have enough power for it and the
necessary time of therapy would exceed the limit of 99:59.
After pressing the dose button it is possible to set dose by steps by the select knob. It is also possible to set the value
directly by the numerical keyboard (see chapter 2.4.2 Numerical keyboard of the BTL-4000 Series USER’S
MANUAL). Under the displayed current value of dose there are "quick jump" buttons – after pressing one of them the
dose value changes to the value written on the button and further setting goes on from this value.

2.2.1.2 Frequency
This parameter states the number of cycles in the time interval of 1 sec, its
unit is Hertz [Hz].
The equipment works either in continuous (i.e. uninterrupted) or in pulse
mode. If the zero value of the laser beam output frequency is set, the
equipment works in the so-called continuous mode (it can be also recognized
visually – the laser beam shines constantly and does not blink). If a non-zero
positive value of frequency is set, the equipment works in the pulse mode

page 10 of 21
LASER THERAPY – USER’S GUIDE

(the laser beam is blinking). Note: the human eye can recognize blinking of the beam up to the frequency of approx.
25 Hz, higher frequencies are subjectively perceived by the human eye as continuous.
Frequency is a second key parameter of therapy – it is also a fixed component of the program (diagnosis) and the
device does not change it at internal calculations (the user can change it freely). Frequency can be set within the
range stated in the technical parameters of the device. The process of frequency setup is similar to that of other
therapy parameters.
After pressing the frequency button it is possible to set frequency by steps by the select knob. It is also possible to set
the value directly by the numerical keyboard (see Chapter 2.4.2 Numerical keyboard of the BTL-4000 Series
USER’S MANUAL). Under the displayed current value of frequency there are "quick jump" buttons – after pressing
one of them the frequency value changes to the value written on the button and further setting goes on from this
value. Frequency is set by certain preset steps.
Setting frequency to 0 means continuous operation.
Acupuncture therapy requires very precise setting of frequency to the values which cannot be set by steps. In such
case it is necessary to enter the exact value of frequency by the numeric keyboard, or to choose the respective
program or diagnosis (Nogier, EAV) in which the frequency is set to the required value.

2.2.1.3 Output power


This therapy parameter is the most dependent on the laser probe being used.
Each laser probe has a limiting value of minimum and maximum laser beam
output which it can generate. The device reads these data from the probe and
does not allow to set a value outside this range. When setting other parameters
(area, dose) the device sets output in the way that the therapy time is, if
possible, 1 minute. If it is necessary to set a certain output value, it is possible
to change the output, and the device will automatically calculate other therapy
parameters.
After pressing the output button it is possible to set output by steps by the select knob. It is also possible to set the
value directly by the numerical keyboard (see chapter 2.4.2 Numerical keyboard of the BTL-4000 Series USER’S
MANUAL). Under the displayed current value of output there are "quick jump" buttons – after pressing one of them
the output value changes to the value written on the button and further setting goes on from this value. Naturally,
output can be set only within the range allowed by the connected laser probe.

2.2.1.4 Area
This therapy parameter is often changed by the user because each treated
part has a different size. This parameter is also available in the ergonomic
mode. When using a divergent probe the screen displays the distance
between the probe and the surface so that the irradiated area equals to the
pre-set one. The maximum displayed distance is 25 cm, and when irradiating
from larger distance the diverged laser beam is too dispersed and
therapeutic effects are lower. If the injured area is larger, it is necessary to
treat it similarly as with convergent probes and continuously "sweep" over the
affected area. With convergent probes, it is necessary to continuously sweep
the beam over the whole injured area. When calculating therapy parameters
the device assumes that the whole area is irradiated evenly, which is
achieved by the above-mentioned continuous sweeping.
The maximum accessible area also depends on the connected laser probe –
for low-power probes the maximum area that can be set can be reduced by
the device if the maximum therapy time 99:59 could be exceeded.
After pressing the area button it is possible to set the area by steps by the
select knob. It is also possible to set the value directly by the numerical keyboard (see chapter 2.4.2 Numerical
keyboard of the BTL-4000 Series USER’S MANUAL). Under the displayed current value of area there are "quick
jump" buttons – after pressing one of them the area value changes to the value written on the button and further
setting goes on from this value.
Area can be also changed directly by turning the intensity knob.

page 11 of 21
LASER THERAPY – USER’S GUIDE

2.2.1.5 Distance between the Probe and Irradiated Surface


When using convergent probes the distance is not measured because the beam is virtually parallel. This parameter
therefore applies only to probes with divergent beam. The distance is a recommended value which is calculated from
the relation between the probe's distance from the irradiated surface, divergence of the beam, and the size of the
irradiated area. Its unit is centimetre [cm]. Further it is necessary to take into account the required depth of penetration
which has to be subtracted from the distance between the probe and body surface.
When using an attachment with lightguide or probes with convergent beam, sweep evenly over the whole pre-set
area. During therapy let the beam, if possible, fall vertically on the surface of the tissue, to prevent undesirable
reflection and possible reduction of energy absorbed by the tissue. It is advisable to degrease the skin before therapy.

2.2.1.6 Time of Therapy


According to pre-set parameters the device automatically calculates other
parameters so that the time of therapy is, if possible, 1 minute. Modification of
the calculated time, if necessary, is possible, but it is important to take into
account that it will also influence the used probe so that the required dose of
therapy is achieved. Maximum time of therapy is 99 minutes and 59 seconds.
In the pulse mode it is possible to modify the time of therapy also by changing
the duty factor (DF) value – to shorten the therapy increase the DF.
After pressing the time button it is possible to set time by minutes or seconds. It
is also possible to set the value directly by the numerical keyboard (see chapter 2.4.2 Numerical keyboard of the
BTL-4000 Series USER’S MANUAL), separaterly for minutes and for seconds.
Time can be also changed directly by turning the time knob.

2.2.1.7 Course of Signal – Duty Factor (DF)


This button serves for displaying of the modulation signal. After pressing this
button there appears a screen with the displayed waveform of the output signal.
If a non-zero frequency is set, it is possible to change the ratio between the
period in which the laser beam does and does not shine, the so-called "Duty
Factor". Duty factor can be changed by the select knob or by the numerical
keyboard.

Adiditional information:

pulse [ms], period [ms] – information about length of the pulse and of the period calculated from the pre-set
frequency and duty factor

frequency [Hz] – information about the pre-set frequency

Duty factor (DF) stated in [%] expresses the ratio of the pulse length ti to the period tp (see picture); it can be set only
in the pulse mode.
Change of value of the duty factor considerably influences the value of the average laser output. The following picture
shows comparison of two different duty factor settings, all other conditions being equal. From the picture it is apparent
that for higher DF the laser emits higher average output which implies shorter time of irradiation.

Comparison of two DF settings

a) f = 10 Hz, P = 20 mW, DF = 50 %

Average output 10 mW
Output [mW]

20

Time [s]
ti=0.05 tm=0.05

tp=0.1

page 12 of 21
LASER THERAPY – USER’S GUIDE

b) f = 10 Hz, P = 20 mW, DF = 90 %

Average output 18 mW
Output [mW]

20
tm=0.01 Time [s]
ti=0.09

tp=0.1

2.2.1.8 Physiological Effects


The symbols of effects used in the device have the following meanings:

A analgesic
F antiphlogistic
E antiedematous
B biostimulation
V vasodilatation

For the factory-preset programs and diagnoses, the effects are filled in. If you are not satisfied with them, you can edit
them and save the program as a user one.¨

2.2.2 Laser Sequences


This feature enables to run sequences of therapies selected by name or number of the program. It enables to create
new sequences and edit the existing ones.

Since a sequence is a series of individual existing therapies one after another, it is necessary that all programs to be
included in the sequence are created before creation of the sequence.
Unlike ultrasound and electro sequences, the laser sequences do not include the time parameter for individual
sections. Time for individual sections is displayed only for information and cannot be changed. The reason is that time
of individual sections is directly influenced by the dose, which is set in each individual section, and the currently
connected probe. Therefore where the probe is replaced, time of individual sections and thus also time of the whole
sequence changes. Time changes so that the needed dose is achieved in each section in the sequence. The total
time of the sequence is limited to 99:59.
The area is set globally for the whole sequence before the start of therapy.

It is possible to set physiological effects in each sequence and to save it


among the user programs. For details see Chapter USER SEQUENCES in
the USER'S MANUAL of the BTL-4000 series devices.

2.3 SPECIFIC SETTINGS

Besides common settings, each generator has some specific setting items. These items are included in the specific
settings menu item which can differ äccording to which tab (generator) is active. The following part describes specific
settings for the laser generator.

page 13 of 21
LASER THERAPY – USER’S GUIDE

2.3.1 Door Activity


Here it is possible to set when the door is considered open - if it is when
voltage is brought or is not brought to the device – see Chapter 2.4
Locking of the Equipment If Door Opens. The screen displays the
door switch setting and its current status; by opening and closing the
door you can check if the door status in the device corresponds to the
actual status. If not, switch the door activity from positive to negative or
vice versa.

In case of any questions, contact the authorized BTL service department. It is also possible to buy the complete door
switch set from the BTL supplier.

2.3.2 Acupuncture
Using a special attachment, the laser generator can measure acupuncture.
Since this attachment is not standardly supplied with the device, the
acupuncture measuring function is off. This item serves for switching the
function on.

When the acupuncture measuring function is on, the acupuncture button


appears among therapy parameters in the manual settings screen. After
pressing this button you can start measuring of acupuncture. The button
displays a horinzontal bargraph the size of which is directly proportional to the skin resistance. The acupuncture point
is indicated by a local jump in the skin resistance. During measuring the device generates a sound the pitch of which
corresponds to the value on the bargraph. Since basic skin resistance of patients differs, it is possible to change the
sensitivity of measuring during the process of acupuncture measuring by the select knob.

To find an acupuncture point, slowly sweep the probe with the acupuncture attachment above the place of an
expected location of the acupuncture point. After finding the acupuncture point it is possible to start therapy by
pressing the button on the probe. During irradiation the device suspends the search mode and returns to it after
stopping the therapy or after activating the pause.
Owing to the fact that the acupuncture attachment significantly attenuates the passing laser beam, the equipment
corrects the maximum adjustable output when irradiating in the acupuncture mode. If you irradiate using the
acupuncture attachment and the acupuncture mode is off, it is necessary to "manually" recalculate the dose or output
for the 85% attachment attenuation.

2.3.3 Self-calibration of the Laser Probe


The probes are calibrated by the manufacturer and the user cannot calibrate them. The internal mechanism in the
probe automatically checks the reached output during therapy and makes corrections so that the displayed output
corresponds to the output generated by the laser probe. If for some reason the probe output does not correspond to
pre-set values and it is not possible to correct the error, the probe's internal automatics sets the probe as defective,
the probe is locked, and further therapy cannot be performed with it.
Self-calibration is a function which tries to put back into operation the probe which was locked as described above. If
self-calibration is run on an unlocked probe, it has no influence on the probe's functioning.

CAUTION
The self-calibration does not in any case replace the required regular calibration and check of the device by
the manufacturer or authorized service of BTL-4000 series devices.

page 14 of 21
LASER THERAPY – USER’S GUIDE

2.4 LOCKING OF THE EQUIPMENT IF DOOR OPENS

According to applicable standards, each laser generator must be equipped with the safety door switch which prevents
generation of the laser beam if the door is open and there is a real danger of hitting an unprotected person by the
laser beam. This door contact is brought to the rear panel of the device. Its position depends on the current
configuration of the device – see table Tab. 2.1 Configuration of output connectors in the BTL-4000 Series
USER’S MANUAL.

If the level on the connector's input is active (e.g. in case of open door) the equipment for safety reasons does not
allow to run a therapy. If a therapy is already running, it is interrupted (PAUSE status) and the screen displays a
warning, optionally together with a sound signal. The therapy can continue only after the signal on the connector's
input subsides (i.e. after closing the door), and it can be cancelled by the esc button. Any security equipment with
voltage output can be connected to this connector. Polarity of voltage does not matter, the equipment detects it and
adapts to it. The minimum voltage is 5V, maximum 35V. The current in the connector is max. 10mA. It is possible to
pre-set if the switch is considered active in the connected or disconnected status (with or without voltage supply).
Defaultly, the switch is set active in the connected status. For details on setting the activity of the door switch see
Chapter 2.3.1 Door Activity. Voltage is brought between the contacts of the connectors 3 and 4.

In case of any questions, contact the authorized BTL service department. It is also possible to buy the complete door
switch set from the BTL supplier.

Power source
AC/DC 5-35V / 10mA

Connector
Door contact

page 15 of 21
LASER THERAPY – USER’S GUIDE

2.5 LASER PROBES

Laser probes are used for laser beam therapy. There are many types manufactured, of various power, and the
customers can choose according to their needs.

Division of probes by the wave length:


• Red probes
• Infrared probes

Division of probes by the type of the beam:


• Convergent – point beam (the probes have additional green lighting for better identification of the point of
incidence of the beam)
• Divergent beam – enables to irradiate larger area at a time without the need of sweeping over the treated tissue
(these probes do not have supplementary lighting).

power cable
direction of laser beam radiation

laser aperture

label with classification and aperture

START / STOP button (emergency laser stop)

indicator of laser activity

Note:
The probes are constructed in the way that the active area of the button does not protrude the outline of the probe.
This prevents from accidental pressing e.g. in case of laying the probe on a flat surface (such as a desk, etc.).

page 16 of 21
LASER THERAPY – USER’S GUIDE

Ageing of the laser probe


The semiconductor laser diodes used in this equipment have a limited lifetime. During this time the diode ages which
leads to decrease of its maximum output. Since all laser diodes are calibrated before mounting into the probes, the
equipment is able to measure the actual output of the diode and can adjust the maximum output that can be set
according to the status of the laser diode. If the output drops under 40 % of the value stated on the probe label
(because of a defect or ageing of the diode) we recommend installing a new probe.
According to the value of the probe output just being emitted, the emission of the laser diode is regulated. This
ensures that the value on the screen is correct and it is not necessary to use an external measuring device for the
probe. Owing to the losses which occur on optical interfaces inside probes, the maximum output that can be pre-set
can be lower than the output stated on the probe label.

2.6 OPTICAL ATTACHMENTS

Special lightguide attachments serve for leading the laser beam to hardly accessible places. The range includes
attachments for dentistry, gynaecology and otorhinolaryngology (ENT). The lightguide attachments reduce the
maximum achievable output of the probe which they are connected to – therefore, when they are used, it is necessary
to make adjustment of the dose or output according to the values given below in the parts concerning individual
attachments.

Note: The attachments are not included as standard accessories of the BTL-4000 series devices.

2.6.1 Dental Attachment

When using the dental optical attachment it is necessary to increase the dose by 15 % (when using probes with
wavelength of 685 nm or 830 nm).

2.6.2 Gynaecological Attachment

When using the gynaecological optical attachment it is necessary to increase the dose by 25 % (when using probes
with wavelength of 685 nm or 830 nm).

2.6.3 ENT Attachment


When using the optical attachment for ENT it is necessary to increase the dose by 20 % (when using probes with
wavelength of 685 nm or 830 nm). Before each use it is necessary to sterilize the attachments for 10 minutes at the
temperature of 120°C.

page 17 of 21
LASER THERAPY – USER’S GUIDE

2.6.4 How to Connect the Attachment


Unscrew the brass cover of the probe's head. In its place screw the plastic attachment with the light waveguide
plugged in. Make sure that the plastic attachment is fixed fast and the light waveguide is immovable. If you want to
replace the attachment by another one, simply loosen the head by approximately one thread, take out the previous
attachment, put in the new one and tighten the head.

2.7 USE OF SAFETY EYEWEAR

According to applicable standards, both the therapist and patient must use safety eyewear which prevents from
damage to eyes in case of undesirable hitting by the laser beam. The protective eyewear supplied by BTL was
approved by the Czech Occupational Safety Research Institute and certified under the number 235/T-010/1999.

page 18 of 21
LASER THERAPY – USER’S GUIDE

3 APPENDIX

3.1 WARNING LABELS PLACED ON THE CASE OF THE DEVICE


AND ON THE LASER PROBE

3.1.1 Label placed on the case of the device, warning about


occurrence of visible and invisible radiation of class 3B

page 19 of 21
LASER THERAPY – USER’S GUIDE

3.1.2 Label placed on the probe, warning about proximity of


aperture of laser of the stated wavelength, power and laser
class

STOP STOP LASER APERTURE


LASER APERTURE
CLASS 3B CLASS 3B
50mW 830nm 30mW 685nm

STOP LASER APERTURE STOP LASER APERTURE


CLASS 3B CLASS 3B
100mW 830nm 50mW 685nm

STOP LASER APERTURE


CLASS 3B
200mW 830nm

STOP LASER APERTURE


CLASS 3B
300mW 830nm

STOP LASER APERTURE


CLASS 3B
400mW 830nm

page 20 of 21
LASER THERAPY – USER’S GUIDE

3.1.3 Label for marking of the laser workplace, warning about


proximity of 3B-class laser

LASER RADIATION
CLASS III. B

page 21 of 21
028-94supload_service100en

Process of upload of application from PC by serial line – for


service
Application shall be loaded into the assembled equipment containing an application or the program loader.

needed equipment and tools

ƒ program equipment "FirmwareLoaderService.exe" version 4.10 or higher - hereinafter "FirmwareLoader"


ƒ serial loading cable
ƒ PC with operating system and a COM port (it is possible to use a USB-COM adapter)

process of upload

Switch the device off by the mains switch (rocker switch on the rear panel). Connect the power adaptor to the device and
switch on the mains switch.

Then switch the device on by longer holding of the ON/OFF button on the front panel. After a while the button should light up
and after releasing it the device should remain in the ON status (shining). After some 15 seconds there should appear the
opening screen of the application. If the device contains the proper version of the application, do not continue. The version of
the application is stated in the initial title on the start-up screen (ver XX.XX.XXXX).

If the device contains only the program loader the display does not show anything, but the device remains in the ON status.

If the device contains different type or version of the application, use the same process.

connection to PC

Switch the device off, press simultaneously the two lower buttons (START/STOP1, START/STOP2) and the ENTER button
and, when holding them pressed, switch the device on. The display should remain dark and after a while (approx. 10
seconds) the device should play a short tune. If so, the device is in the mode for upload of firmware by external serial line.
Remove cover from service connector on bottom panel. Conect the loading cable to the service connector on the bottom
panel. The other end of the cable connect to the serial port of the PC – it is also possible to use the USB-COM adapter.
Start the "FirmwareLoader.exe" program on the PC.
We recommend setting the communication speed to 115200 bit/s.
The version of the loader can be found out after loading of HW Info (see below). If you are not sure you can leave this item
checked off, the loading will work even with the new devices, but it will be slower.
Set the proper communication port ("Settings" tab) and communication rate. It is possible to use the "Auto find" function
which will try to find the device in all available serial ports (only the ports really connected to the computer are displayed).

To check the connection with the device at any time press the "Check connection" button in the program. If everything works
OK, the dialog box with the message "Unit present" must appear then.
If there appears the message "Unit not found", the computer cannot connect to the device for a reason – it is necessary to
find out why, try to repeat the previous steps with other communication rate, check the cable, etc.

unit HW Info

Switch over to the "Unit info" tab and press the "Reload" button in the upper left corner of the window. The percentage status
of communication should appear at the bottom of the window.
After a while a table in the program should list the hardware configuration of the tested device.
On the "Unit info" tab you can see the hardware configuration of the device. The key data are especially the version of the
loader and the versions of particular printed circuits in the equipment. Unit info can be updated (reloaded from the device) at
any time by pressing the "Reload" button.

- 1 - TN02/07/04
028-94supload_service100en

loading of firmware

If the information in the Unit info is correct it is possible to start loading of firmware. Switch to the "Programming" tab.
Press the button with a directory tree symbol to select the file with the application to be loaded to the device
(028-56autoXXX.bin). The selected file is displayed in the upper field. The program remembers the last setting.

Press the "Program file auto" button to start the procedure which compares the selected file with data from the device – if the
device is compatible, this procedure modifies the loaded file according to parameters read from the device and starts loading
of the program to the device. If any problem occurs, there appears an error message with possible description of the error.
During loading the program informs about the current percentage status of completion.

If programming passed OK, there appears the dialog box "Complete OK". Now you can reset and disconnect the device.

To abort programming press the "Abort action" button. However, after starting a device with incompletely loaded firmware
there is a risk of its failure.

reset and disconnection of the device

If this work with the device is complete, disconnect it by pressing the "Restart unit" button. The device first restarts itself and
then the PC disconnects from it.

- 2 - TN02/07/04
028-94supload_service100en

Appendix

supplementary description and explanation

Loading is completely automatic, i.e. it is not necessary to check the versions in the device and the loaded file. The program
automatically modifies itself according to the parameters read from the device – i.e., if the program finds out that the device
contains another type of hardware than is set in the loaded file, the loaded file is internally modified before loading so that it
corresponds to the configuration of the device. This automatic control is fully functional if there have not been any major
hardware changes in the device. If there have been such changes, it is necessary to load the correct new configuration (i.e.
file with the correct new hardware configuration) at least once to the device. A typical example is replacement of the supply
part in physiotherapy devices by a more powerful one: in such case it is not possible to load the universal file to the device
as usually, but at the first loading after the replacement it is necessary to load to the device a specific file containing this
change. Next loading works standardly with the automatic configuration.

It is possible to upload to several devices at the same time – their number is limited only by the number of COM ports on the
PC. Each of these devices has its own FirmwareLoader session running.

During loading do not move the window with the running application in the Windows environment, otherwise there is a risk of
a programming error – in such case restart programming.

- 3 - TN02/07/04
028-94supload_user100en

Process of upload of application from PC by serial line – for end


users

needed equipment and tools

ƒ program equipment "FirmwareLoaderMini.exe" version 4.10 or higher - hereinafter "FirmwareLoader"


ƒ serial loading cable
ƒ PC with MS Windows operating system and a serial port (it is possible to use a USB-COM adapter)

controls of FirmwareLoader

1 … path and name of the file with new firmware 7 … setting of communication speed
2 … button for starting of upload of new firmware 8 … cancelled
3 … button for searching for a file with new firmware 9 … cancelled
4 … process of upload of new firmware 10 … button for check of correct connection of the device to PC
5 … button for automatic searching 11 … button for restart of the device
6 … selection of communication port 12 … button for termination of the program FirmwareLoader

process of upload

Switch the device off by the mains switch (rocker switch on the rear panel). Connect the adaptor to the device and switch on
the mains switch. Then switch the device on by longer holding of the ON/OFF button on the front panel. After a while the
button should light up and after releasing it the device should remain in the ON status (shining). After some 15 seconds
there should appear the opening screen of the application. If the device contains the proper version of the application, do not

- 1 - TN02/07/2004
028-94supload_user100en

continue. The version of the application is stated in the initial title on the start-up screen (ver XX.XX.XXXX) or in the menu
item "unit settings" – "unit information".

connection to PC

Remove cover from service connector on bottom panel. Conect the loading cable to the service connector on the bottom
panel. The other end of the cable connect to the serial port of the PC – it is also possible to use the USB-COM adapter.

Switch the device off, press simultaneously the two lower buttons (START/STOP1, START/STOP2) and the ENTER button
and, when holding them pressed, switch the device on. The display should remain dark and after a while (approx. 10
seconds) the device should play a short tune. If so, the device is in the mode for upload of firmware by external serial line.

Start the "FirmwareLoader" program on the PC.

We recommend setting the communication speed to 115200 bit/s (7).

Set the correct communication port (6) and communication speed (7). It is possible to use the "Auto find" function (5) which
will try to find the device in all available serial ports. (Note: In some types of computer this function may not work reliably.)

Check the connection with the device by the "Check connection" button (10). If everything works OK, the dialog box with the
message "Unit present" must appear after pressing this button. If there appears the message "Unit not found", the computer
cannot connect to the device for a reason – it is necessary to find out why, try to repeat the previous steps with other
communication speed, check the cable, etc.

Note:
If the program does not find the device on the first try, it is suitable to press the "Check connection" button (10) for several
more times, the device could respond later.

loading of firmware

!!! ATTENTION !!!


Loading of firmware is a very delicate process which under certain conditions can disable work with the device.
The loading program is designed to minimize the possibility of an error; however, some risk still remains. Therefore
it is recommended that you have some experience with computers before performing this action.

Do not switch the device and/or the PC during loading – incorrectly loaded firmware could cause locking of the
device (this status could require even a servicing intervention of the manufacturer).

During loading do not move the window with the running application in the Windows environment, otherwise there
is a risk of a programming error – in such case restart programming.

Press the "Browse file" button (3) with a directory tree symbol to select the file with the application to be loaded to the device.
The selected file is displayed in the upper field (1). The program remembers the last setting.

Press the "Program file auto" button (2) to start loading of the program to the device. First there is detected configuration of
the device and consistency of the loaded file. This part is indicated by the message "Reading unit information…" (4). If any
incompatibilities or other problems are found, there appears an error message with the description of the error. These errors
are usually caused by incorrect or corrupted input file – in such case it is necessary to get a new file.

After this testing the process of loading is started – it is indicated by the message "Programming…" (4). If any problem
appears during programming, an error message is displayed. During loading the program informs about the current
percentage status of completion. If an error occurs during programming, do not switch the device off and restart
programming. If the error repeats, contact the service department.

If programming passed OK, there appears the dialog box "Complete OK". Now you can reset and disconnect the device.

reset and disconnection of the device

If this work with the device is complete, disconnect it by pressing the "Restart unit" button (11). The device first restarts and
then the PC disconnects from it. After restart of the device there should appear the standard opening screen of the

- 2 - TN02/07/2004
028-94supload_user100en

application and it is possible to standardly work with the device. To check that the new version of firmware is loaded in the
device, see the "unit information" menu item.

Disconnect serial cable from unit and put cover back to serial connector.

- 3 - TN02/07/2004
036-65gener108z1

PART TYPE Reference Side


ECE-1000U16VXXT CE1 Top
ECE-330U35VXXM CE2 Top
ECE-330U35VXXM CE3 Top
ECE+47U35VXXM CE4 Top
ECE-330U35VXXM CE5 Top
ECE-22U200VXXM CE6 Top
ECE-22U200VXXM CE7 Top
ECE+47U35VXXM CE8 Top
ECE-330U35VXXM CE9 Top
ECE+47U35VXXM CE10 Top
ECE+47U35VXXM CE11 Top
ECE+47U35VXXM CE12 Top
ECE+10U35VXXM CE13 Top
ECE+47U35VXXM CE14 Top
ECE+10U35VXXM CE15 Top
ECE+10U35VXXM CE16 Top
ECE+10U35VXXM CE17 Top
ECE+10U35VXXM CE18 Top
ECE+10U35VXXM CE19 Top
ECE+10U35VXXM CE20 Top
ECE+10U35VXXM CE22 Top
ECE+10U35VXXM CE23 Top
ECE+47U35VXXM CE24 Top
ECF-47N275VXXM CF1 Top
ECF-47N275VXXM CF2 Top
ECHL-V7132XX0 CHL1 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK18 Top
ECK+100P50VXXJ CK19 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK20 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK21 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK22 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK23 Top
ECK+10N50VXXZ CK24 Top
ECK+100P50VXXJ CK25 Top
ECK+1U16VXXZ CK26 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK27 Top
ECK+1U16VXXZ CK28 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK29 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK30 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK31 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK32 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK33 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK34 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK35 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK36 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK37 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK38 Top
ECK+22P50VXXJ CK39 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK40 Top
ECK+22P50VXXJ CK41 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK42 Top
036-65gener108z1

ECK+100N50VXXZ CK43 Top


ECK+100N50VXXZ CK44 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK45 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK46 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK47 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK48 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK49 Top
ECK+47P50VXXJ CK50 Top
ECK+47P50VXXJ CK51 Top
ECK+100P50VXXJ CK52 Top
ECK+47P50VXXJ CK53 Top
ECK+47P50VXXJ CK54 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK55 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK56 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK57 Top
ECK+100P50VXXJ CK58 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK59 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK60 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK61 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK62 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK63 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK64 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK65 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK66 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK67 Top
ECK+100P50VXXJ CK68 Top
ECK+100P50VXXJ CK69 Top
ECK-120P500VXX0 CK70 Top
ECK+22P50VXXJ CK71 Top
ECK-120P500VXX0 CK72 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK73 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK74 Top
ECK+10N50VXXZ CK75 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK76 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK77 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK78 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK79 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK80 Top
ECK-1N500VXXM CK81 Top
ECK-1N500VXXM CK82 Top
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK83 Top
ECK+47P50VXXJ CK84 Top
ECK-22P500VXXJ CK85 Top
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK86 Top
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK87 Top
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK88 Top
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK89 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK90 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK91 Top
ECK+220P50VXXJ CK92 Bottom
ECK+22P50VXXJ CK93 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD2 Top
036-65gener108z1

EDD+BAV99XX0 DD3 Top


EDD+BAV99XX0 DD4 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD5 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD6 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD7 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD8 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD9 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD10 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD11 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD12 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD13 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD14 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD15 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD16 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD17 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD18 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD19 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD20 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD21 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD22 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD23 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD24 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD25 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD26 Top
EF-MSF0.16ASC0 F1 Top
EJ-B03-VHJS0 J1 Top
EJ-89400-07XX0 J2 Top
EJ-B02-VHJS0 J4 Top
EJ-B02-VHJS0 J5 Top
EJ-MLW10GXX0 J6 Top
EJ-89400-15XX0 J7 Top
EL+JCB09151XX0 L1 Top
EL+JCB09151XX0 L2 Top
EL+JCB09152XX0 L3 Top
EL+JCB09152XX0 L4 Top
EL+JCB09152XX0 L5 Top
EL+220U0.66AXX0 L6 Top
EL+220U0.66AXX0 L7 Top
EL+220U0.66AXX0 L8 Top
EL+220U0.66AXX0 L9 Top
EL+220U0.66AXX0 L10 Top
EL+JCB09152XX0 L11 Top
EL+JCB09152XX0 L12 Top
EL+JCB09151XX0 L13 Top
EL+JCB09152XX0 L14 Top
EL+JCB09152XX0 L15 Top
EL+JCB09152XX0 L16 Top
EL+JCB09151XX0 L17 Top
EL+JCB09151XX0 L18 Top
EL+JCB09151XX0 L19 Top
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED MH1 Top
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED MH2 Top
036-65gener108z1

MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED MH3 Top


MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED MH4 Top
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED MH5 Top
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED MH6 Top
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED MH7 Top
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED MH8 Top
MTHOLE4.0_NONPLATED MH9 Top
MTHOLE4.0_NONPLATED MH10 Top
MTHOLE4.0_NONPLATED MH11 Top
MTHOLE4.0_NONPLATED MH12 Top
MTHOLE4.0_NONPLATED MH13 Top
MTHOLE4.0_NONPLATED MH14 Top
MTHOLE4.0_NONPLATED MH15 Top
MTHOLE4.0_NONPLATED MH16 Top
MTHOLE4.0_NONPLATED MH17 Top
MTHOLE4.0_NONPLATED MH18 Top
MTHOLE4.0_NONPLATED MH19 Top
MTHOLE4.0_NONPLATED MH20 Top
MTHOLE4.0_NONPLATED MH21 Top
MTHOLE4.0_NONPLATED MH22 Top
MTHOLE4.0_NONPLATED MH23 Top
MTHOLE4.0_NONPLATED MH24 Top
MTHOLE4.0_NONPLATED MH25 Top
NAVADECI_ZNACKA_BUTTERFLY NZ1 Top
NAVADECI_ZNACKA_BUTTERFLY NZ2 Top
NAVADECI_ZNACKA_BUTTERFLY NZ4 Top
NAVADECI_ZNACKA_DIAMOND NZ6 Top
NAVADECI_ZNACKA_DIAMOND NZ7 Top
NAVADECI_ZNACKA_DIAMOND NZ8 Top
EO+PC817XX0 O1 Top
EO+PC817XX0 O2 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R1 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R2 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R3 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R4 Top
ER+2K20.1WXXF R5 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R6 Top
ER+2K20.1WXXF R7 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R8 Top
ER+4R70.1WXXJ R9 Top
ER+2K20.1WXXF R10 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R11 Top
ER+22K1WXXJ R12 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R13 Top
ER+22K0.1WXXF R14 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R15 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R16 Top
ER+22K1WXXJ R17 Top
ER+22K0.1WXXF R18 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R19 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R20 Top
ER+1K0.1WXXF R38 Top
036-65gener108z1

ER+47K0.1WXXF R39 Top


ER+100R0.1WXXF R40 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R41 Top
ER-0.16R0.6WXX0 R42 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R43 Top
ER+2K20.1WXXF R44 Top
ER+2K20.1WXXF R45 Top
ER-0.16R0.6WXX0 R46 Top
ER-0.16R0.6WXX0 R47 Top
ER-0.16R0.6WXX0 R48 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R49 Top
ER+22K0.1WXXF R50 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R51 Top
ER+4R70.1WXXJ R52 Top
ER+100R0.1WXXF R53 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R54 Top
ER+22R0.1WXXF R55 Top
ER+470K0.1WXXF R56 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R57 Top
ER+47R1WXXJ R58 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R59 Top
ER+22K0.1WXXF R60 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R61 Top
ER+100R0.1WXXF R62 Top
ER-560K0,6WXX0 R63 Top
ER+47R0.1WXXF R64 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R65 Top
ER+10R0.1WXXF R66 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R67 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R68 Top
ER+22K1WXXJ R69 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R70 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R71 Top
ER+2K20.1WXXF R72 Top
ER+22R0.1WXXF R73 Top
ER+22K1WXXJ R74 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R75 Top
ER+100K0.1WXXF R76 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R77 Top
ER+47R1WXXJ R78 Top
ER+470K0.1WXXF R79 Top
ER+22K1WXXJ R80 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R81 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R82 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R83 Top
ER+1K0.1WXXF R84 Top
ER+2K20.1WXXF R85 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R86 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R87 Top
ER+100K0.1WXXF R88 Top
ER+100K0.1WXXF R89 Top
ER+220R0.1WXXF R105 Top
036-65gener108z1

ER+47K0.1WXXF R106 Top


ER+220R0.1WXXF R107 Top
ER+220R0.1WXXF R108 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R109 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R110 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R111 Top
ER+220R0.1WXXF R112 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R113 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R114 Top
ER+10R0.1WXXF R115 Top
ER+1K0.1WXXF R116 Top
ER+220R0.1WXXF R117 Top
ER+1K0.1WXXF R118 Top
ER+4R70.1WXXJ R119 Top
ER+1K0.1WXXF R120 Top
ER+10M0.1WXXJ R121 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R122 Top
ER+1M0.1WXXF R123 Top
ER+470K0.1WXXF R124 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R125 Top
ER+100K0.1WXXF R126 Top
ER+470K0.1WXXF R127 Top
ER+2K20.1WXXF R128 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R129 Top
ER+100K0.1WXXF R130 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R131 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R132 Top
ER+100R0.1WXXF R133 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R134 Top
ER+2K20.1WXXF R135 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R136 Top
ER+470K0.1WXXF R137 Top
ER+2K20.1WXXF R138 Top
ER+1K0.1WXXF R139 Top
ER+2K20.1WXXF R140 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R141 Top
ER+10R0.1WXXF R142 Top
ER+4R70.1WXXJ R143 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R144 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R145 Top
ER+2K20.1WXXF R146 Top
ER+470K0.1WXXF R147 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R148 Top
ER+100R0.1WXXF R149 Top
ER+470K0.1WXXF R150 Top
ER+22K0.1WXXF R151 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R152 Top
ER+2K20.1WXXF R153 Top
ER+2K20.1WXXF R154 Top
ER+1K0.1WXXF R155 Top
ER+1M0.1WXXF R156 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R157 Top
036-65gener108z1

ER+2K20.1WXXF R158 Top


ER+47K0.1WXXF R159 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R160 Top
ER+100R0.1WXXF R161 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R162 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R163 Top
ER+1M0.1WXXF R164 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R165 Top
ER+47R1WXXJ R166 Top
ER+1M0.1WXXF R167 Top
ER+10M0.1WXXJ R168 Top
ER+4R70.1WXXJ R169 Top
ER+2K20.1WXXF R170 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R171 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R172 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R173 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R174 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R175 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R176 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R177 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXB R178 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXB R179 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXB R180 Top
ER+1K0.1WXXF R181 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R182 Top
ER+1K0.1WXXF R183 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R184 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R185 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R186 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R199 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R200 Top
ER+10M0.1WXXJ R201 Top
ER+10R0.1WXXF R202 Top
ER+10R0.1WXXF R203 Top
ER+100R0.1WXXF R204 Top
ER-560K0,6WXX0 R205 Top
ER+100R0.1WXXF R206 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R207 Top
ER+100R0.1WXXF R208 Top
ER+100R0.1WXXF R209 Top
ER+100R0.1WXXF R210 Top
ER+100R0.1WXXF R211 Top
ER+47R0.1WXXF R212 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R213 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R214 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R215 Top
ER+220R0.1WXXF R216 Bottom
ERL-H820F05XX0 RL1 Top
ERL-M3S06TXX0 RL2 Top
ERL-M3S06TXX0 RL3 Top
ERP+47K0.15XX0 RP1 Top
ERT+KTY82220PH0 RT1 Bottom
036-65gener108z1

SESAZOVACI_ZNACKA SZ1 Top


SESAZOVACI_ZNACKA SZ2 Top
SESAZOVACI_ZNACKA SZ3 Top
TEST_POINT TP1 Top
TEST_POINT TP2 Top
TEST_POINT TP3 Top
TEST_POINT TP4 Top
TEST_POINT TP5 Top
TEST_POINT TP6 Top
TEST_POINT TP7 Top
TEST_POINT TP8 Top
TEST_POINT TP9 Top
TEST_POINT TP10 Top
TEST_POINT TP11 Top
TEST_POINT TP12 Top
TEST_POINT TP13 Top
ETR-1-1-8PXX0 TR1 Top
ETR-100V-10PXX0 TR2 Top
EX+22.118MXX0 X1 Top
031-65gener104z2

PART TYPE Reference Side


ECE-330U35VXXM CE1 Bottom
ECE-330U35VXXM CE2 Bottom
ECE+47U35VXXM CE3 Bottom
ECE+10U35VXXM CE4 Bottom
ECE+10U35VXXM CE5 Bottom
ECE-330U35VXXM CE6 Bottom
ECE-330U35VXXM CE7 Bottom
ECE+47U35VXXM CE8 Bottom
ECE+47U35VXXM CE9 Bottom
ECE-330U35VXXM CE10 Bottom
ECE-330U35VXXM CE11 Bottom
ECE-330U35VXXM CE12 Bottom
ECE-330U35VXXM CE13 Bottom
ECE-330U35VXXM CE14 Bottom
ECE+47U35VXXM CE15 Bottom
ECE-330U35VXXM CE16 Bottom
ECE+10U35VXXM CE17 Bottom
ECE-330U35VXXM CE18 Bottom
ECE-330U35VXXM CE19 Bottom
ECE-330U35VXXM CE20 Bottom
ECE+47U35VXXM CE21 Bottom
ECE-330U35VXXM CE22 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK1 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK2 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK3 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK4 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK5 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK6 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK7 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK8 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK9 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK10 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK11 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK12 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK13 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK14 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK15 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK16 Bottom
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK17 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK18 Bottom
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK19 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK20 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK21 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK22 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK23 Bottom
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK24 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK25 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK26 Bottom
ECK+22P50VXXJ CK27 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK28 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK29 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK30 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK31 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK32 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK33 Bottom
031-65gener104z2

ECK+100N50VXXZ CK34 Bottom


ECK+100N50VXXZ CK35 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK36 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK37 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK53 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK54 Bottom
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK55 Bottom
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK56 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK57 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK58 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK59 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK60 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK61 Bottom
ECK+10N50VXXZ CK62 Bottom
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK63 Bottom
ECK+47P50VXXJ CK64 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK65 Bottom
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK66 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK67 Bottom
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK68 Bottom
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK69 Bottom
EDL+SMDYELOWXX0 DL3 Bottom
EDL+SMDGREENXX0 DL4 Bottom
EDL+SMDYELOWXX0 DL5 Bottom
EDL+SMDYELOWXX0 DL6 Bottom
EDS+12CWQ06XX0 DS1 Bottom
EDS+12CWQ06XX0 DS2 Bottom
EDZ+BZX845V6XXJ DZ1 Bottom
EDZ+BZX84C13XXJ DZ2 Bottom
EDZ+BZX84C13XXJ DZ3 Bottom
EDZ+BZX84C13XXJ DZ4 Bottom
EJ-89400-07XX0 J1 Bottom
EJ-89400-07XX0 J2 Bottom
EJ-89400-07XX0 J3 Bottom
EJ-89400-07XX0 J4 Bottom
EJ-MLW10GXX0 J5 Bottom
EJ-B03-VHJS0 J6 Bottom
EJ-S1G2XX0 J7 Bottom
EJ-S1G2XX0 J8 Bottom
EJ-BL816GXX0 J9 Bottom
EJ-S1G2XX0 J10 Bottom
EJ+6504-34P2XX0 J11 Bottom
EL+JCB09152XX0 L1 Bottom
EL+JCB09152XX0 L2 Bottom
EL+JCB09152XX0 L3 Bottom
EL+JCB09152XX0 L4 Bottom
EL+JCB09152XX0 L5 Bottom
EL+JCB09152XX0 L6 Bottom
EL+10U4AXX0 L7 Bottom
EL+JCB09152XX0 L8 Bottom
EL+68U1.52AXX0 L9 Bottom
EL+10U4AXX0 L10 Bottom
EL+JCB09152XX0 L11 Bottom
EL+68U1.52AXX0 L12 Bottom
EL+JCB09152XX0 L13 Bottom
EL+10U4AXX0 L14 Bottom
031-65gener104z2

EL+JCB09152XX0 L15 Bottom


EL+10U4AXX0 L16 Bottom
EL+10U4AXX0 L17 Bottom
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED MH1 Top
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED MH2 Top
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED MH3 Top
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED MH4 Top
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED MH5 Top
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED MH6 Top
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED MH7 Top
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED MH8 Top
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED MH9 Top
NAVADECI_ZNACKA_BUTTE RFLY NZ1 Bottom
NAVADECI_ZNACKA NZ2 Bottom
NAVADECI_ZNACKA_DIAMO ND NZ3 Bottom
NAVADECI_ZNACKA_BUTTE RFLY NZ4 Bottom
NAVADECI_ZNACKA_DIAMO ND NZ5 Bottom
NAVADECI_ZNACKA NZ6 Bottom
NAVADECI_ZNACKA NZ7 Bottom
NAVADECI_ZNACKA_BUTTE RFLY NZ8 Bottom
NAVADECI_ZNACKA_DIAMO ND NZ9 Bottom
NAVADECI_ZNACKA NZ10 Bottom
NAVADECI_ZNACKA_DIAMO ND NZ11 Bottom
NAVADECI_ZNACKA_BUTTE RFLY NZ12 Bottom
EO+PC817XX0 O2 Bottom
EO+PC817XX0 O3 Bottom
EO+H11L1VXX0 O4 Bottom
EO+H11L1VXX0 O5 Bottom
EO+PC817XX0 O6 Bottom
ER+4K70.1WXXF R1 Bottom
ER+4K70.1WXXF R2 Bottom
ER+1K0.1WXXF R3 Bottom
ER+100K0.1WXXF R4 Bottom
ER+4K70.1WXXF R5 Bottom
ER+47R0.1WXXF R6 Bottom
ER+100K0.1WXXF R7 Bottom
ER+470R0.1WXXF R8 Bottom
ER+470R0.1WXXF R9 Bottom
ER+10K0.1WXXF R10 Bottom
ER+470R0.1WXXF R11 Bottom
ER+10K0.1WXXF R31 Bottom
ER+47R0.1WXXF R32 Bottom
ER+47K0.1WXXF R33 Bottom
ER+10K0.1WXXF R34 Bottom
ER+2K20.1WXXF R35 Bottom
ER+10M0.1WXXJ R36 Bottom
ER+10K0.1WXXF R37 Bottom
ER+100K0.1WXXF R38 Bottom
ER+2K20.1WXXF R39 Bottom
ER+22K0.1WXXF R40 Bottom
ER+22K0.1WXXF R41 Bottom
ER+470R0.1WXXF R42 Bottom
ER+1K0.1WXXF R43 Bottom
ER+100K0.1WXXF R44 Bottom
ER+470K0.1WXXF R45 Bottom
ER+100K0.1WXXF R46 Bottom
031-65gener104z2

ER+470R0.1WXXF R47 Bottom


ER+470R0.1WXXF R48 Bottom
ER+470R0.1WXXF R49 Bottom
ER+47R0.1WXXF R50 Bottom
ER+1M0.1WXXF R51 Bottom
ER+1M0.1WXXF R52 Bottom
ER+1M0.1WXXF R53 Bottom
ER+4K70.1WXXF R54 Bottom
ER+4K70.1WXXF R55 Bottom
ER+4K70.1WXXF R56 Bottom
ER+100K0.1WXXF R57 Bottom
ER+22K0.1WXXF R58 Bottom
ER+100K0.1WXXF R59 Bottom
ER+220K0.1WXXF R60 Bottom
ER+1K0.1WXXF R61 Bottom
ER+470K0.1WXXF R62 Bottom
ER+100K0.1WXXF R63 Bottom
ER+47K0.1WXXF R64 Bottom
ER+47R0.1WXXF R65 Bottom
ER+47R0.1WXXF R66 Bottom
ER+47R0.1WXXF R67 Bottom
ER+1K0.1WXXF R68 Bottom
ER+1K0.1WXXF R69 Bottom
ER+1K0.1WXXF R70 Bottom
ER+1K0.1WXXF R71 Bottom
ER+10K0.1WXXF R72 Bottom
ER+22K0.1WXXF R73 Bottom
ER+22K0.1WXXF R75 Bottom
ER+2K20.1WXXF R76 Bottom
ER+1M0.1WXXF R77 Bottom
ER+470K0.1WXXF R78 Bottom
ER+2K20.1WXXF R79 Bottom
ER+100K0.1WXXF R80 Bottom
ER+2K20.1WXXF R81 Bottom
ER+10K0.1WXXF R82 Bottom
ER+47K0.1WXXF R83 Bottom
ER+4K70.1WXXF R84 Bottom
ER+1K0.1WXXF R85 Bottom
ER+10K0.1WXXF R86 Bottom
ER+470R0.1WXXF R87 Bottom
ER+100K0.1WXXF R88 Bottom
ER+47K0.1WXXF R89 Bottom
ER+47K0.1WXXF R90 Bottom
ER+470R0.1WXXF R91 Bottom
ER+47K0.1WXXF R92 Bottom
ER+22K0.1WXXF R93 Bottom
ER+2K20.1WXXF R94 Bottom
ER+220K0.1WXXF R95 Bottom
ER+47K0.1WXXF R96 Bottom
ER+22K0.1WXXF R97 Bottom
ER+220K0.1WXXF R98 Bottom
ER+220K0.1WXXF R99 Bottom
ER+22K0.1WXXF R100 Bottom
ER+470R0.1WXXF R101 Bottom
ER+470R0.1WXXF R102 Bottom
ER+1K0.1WXXF R103 Bottom
031-65gener104z2

ER+2K20.1WXXF R104 Bottom


ER+2K20.1WXXF R105 Bottom
ER+10R0.1WXXF R106 Bottom
ER+10R0.1WXXF R107 Bottom
ER+47K0.1WXXF R108 Bottom
ER+470R0.1WXXF R109 Bottom
ER+4K70.1WXXF R110 Bottom
ER+22K0.1WXXF R111 Bottom
ER+22K0.1WXXF R112 Bottom
EJ+JUMPERXX0 R113 Bottom
ER-0.16R0.6WXX0 R114 Bottom
ER-0.16R0.6WXX0 R115 Bottom
ER-0.16R0.6WXX0 R116 Bottom
ER+10R0.1WXXF R117 Bottom
ER+22K0.1WXXF R118 Bottom
ER+2K20.1WXXF R119 Bottom
ER+2K20.1WXXF R120 Bottom
ER+22K0.1WXXF R121 Bottom
ER+22K0.1WXXF R122 Bottom
ER+22K0.1WXXF R123 Bottom
EJ+JUMPERXX0 R124 Bottom
ER+100K0.1WXXF R125 Bottom
ER+1M0.1WXXF R126 Bottom
ER+22K0.1WXXF R127 Bottom
ER+220K0.1WXXF R128 Bottom
ER+10K0.1WXXF R129 Bottom
ER+47K0.1WXXF R130 Bottom
ER+22K0.1WXXF R131 Bottom
ER+47K0.1WXXF R132 Bottom
ER+10K0.1WXXF R133 Bottom
ERL-H820F12XX0 RL1 Bottom
ERL-H820F12XX0 RL2 Bottom
ERL-H820F12XX0 RL3 Bottom
ERL-H820F12XX0 RL4 Bottom
ERL-H820F12XX0 RL5 Bottom
ERP+47K0.15XX0 RP1 Bottom
ERP+4K70.15XX0 RP2 Bottom
ERT+KTY82220PH0 RT1 Bottom
TEST_POINT TP1 Bottom
TEST_POINT TP2 Bottom
TEST_POINT TP3 Bottom
TEST_POINT TP4 Bottom
TEST_POINT TP5 Bottom
TEST_POINT TP6 Bottom
TEST_POINT TP7 Bottom
TEST_POINT TP8 Bottom
TEST_POINT TP9 Bottom
UZEL_1_1 UZ1 Bottom
UZEL_1_1 UZ2 Bottom
UZEL_1_1 UZ3 Bottom
UZEL_1_1 UZ4 Bottom
UZEL_1_1 UZ5 Bottom
UZEL_1_1 UZ6 Bottom
EX+18.432MXX0 X1 Bottom
028-65shcpu103z2

PART TYPE Reference Side


EBAT-CR2430HXX0 BAT1 Top
ECE+47U35VXXM CE1 Top
ECE+47U35VXXM CE2 Top
ECE+47U35VXXM CE3 Top
ECE+47U35VXXM CE4 Top
ECE+47U35VXXM CE22 Top
ECE+2.2U50VXXM CE23 Top
ECE+2.2U50VXXM CE24 Top
ECE+2.2U50VXXM CE25 Top
ECE+2.2U50VXXM CE26 Top
ECE+47U35VXXM CE27 Top
ECE+47U35VXXM CE28 Top
ECE+47U35VXXM CE29 Top
ECE+47U35VXXM CE30 Top
ECK+22P50VXXJ CK1 Top
ECK+22P50VXXJ CK2 Top
ECK+22P50VXXJ CK3 Top
ECK+22P50VXXJ CK4 Top
ECK+470P50VXXJ CK5 Top
ECK+470P50VXXJ CK6 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK7 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK8 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK9 Top
ECK+3U316VXXZ CK10 Top
ECK+10N50VXXZ CK11 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK12 Top
ECK+3U316VXXZ CK13 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK14 Top
ECK+10N50VXXZ CK15 Bottom
ECK+10N50VXXZ CK16 Bottom
ECK+10N50VXXZ CK17 Top
ECK+10N50VXXZ CK18 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK19 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK20 Top
ECK+3U316VXXZ CK21 Top
ECK+3U316VXXZ CK22 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK23 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK24 Top
ECK+47P50VXXJ CK25 Top
ECK+22P50VXXJ CK26 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK27 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK28 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK29 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK30 Top
ECK+3U316VXXZ CK31 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK32 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK33 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK34 Top
ECK+3U316VXXZ CK35 Top
ECK+3U316VXXZ CK36 Bottom
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK37 Bottom
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK38 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK39 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK40 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK41 Bottom
028-65shcpu103z2

ECK+1N50VXXJ CK42 Top


ECK+1N50VXXJ CK43 Bottom
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK44 Bottom
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK45 Bottom
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK46 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK47 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK48 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK49 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK50 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK51 Bottom
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK52 Top
ECK+3U316VXXZ CK53 Bottom
ECK+3U316VXXZ CK54 Bottom
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK55 Top
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK56 Bottom
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK57 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK58 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK59 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK60 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK61 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK62 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK76 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK77 Top
ECK+3U316VXXZ CK78 Top
ECK+3U316VXXZ CK79 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK80 Top
ECK+3U316VXXZ CK81 Top
ECK+3U316VXXZ CK82 Top
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK83 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK84 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK85 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK86 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK87 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK88 Top
ECK+3U316VXXZ CK89 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK90 Top
ECK+3U316VXXZ CK91 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK92 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK93 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK94 Bottom
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK95 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK96 Top
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK97 Top
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK98 Top
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK99 Top
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK100 Top
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK101 Top
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK102 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK103 Bottom
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK104 Bottom
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK105 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK106 Bottom
ECK+10N50VXXZ CK107 Bottom
ECK+22P50VXXJ CK108 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK109 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK110 Top
028-65shcpu103z2

ECK+100N50VXXZ CK111 Bottom


ECK+47P50VXXJ CK112 Bottom
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK122 Top
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK123 Top
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK124 Top
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK125 Bottom
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK126 Bottom
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK127 Bottom
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK128 Bottom
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK129 Top
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK130 Top
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK131 Bottom
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK132 Bottom
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK133 Bottom
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK134 Bottom
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK135 Bottom
ECK+22P50VXXJ CK136 Bottom
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK166 Bottom
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK167 Bottom
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK168 Bottom
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK169 Bottom
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD1 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD2 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD3 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD4 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD5 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD6 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD7 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD8 Bottom
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD9 Bottom
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD10 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD11 Top
EDL+SMDGREENXX0 DL1 Top
EDL+SMDGREENXX0 DL2 Top
EDS+SS16XX0 DS2 Top
EDZ+BZX84C10XXJ DZ3 Top
EDZ+BZX84C10XXJ DZ4 Top
EDZ+BZX84C10XXJ DZ5 Top
EDZ+BZX84C10XXJ DZ6 Top
EJ-BL840GDXX0 J1 Top
EJ+JUMPERXX0 J2 Top
EJ-MLW26AXX0 J3 Bottom
EJ-BLW820GXX0 J4 Top
EJ-MLW10GXX0 J5 Top
EJ+JUMPERXX0 J6 Top
EJ-89400-07XX0 J7 Top
EJ-MLW10GXX0 J8 Top
EJ-S1G2XX0 J9 Top
EJ-BLW820GXX0 J10 Top
EJ-B02-VHJS0 J11 Top
EL+JCB09152XX0 L1 Bottom
EL+JCB09152XX0 L2 Top
EL+JCB09152XX0 L3 Top
EL+JCB09152XX0 L4 Top
EL+JCB09152XX0 L5 Top
EL+JCB09151XX0 L6 Top
028-65shcpu103z2

EL+JCB09151XX0 L7 Bottom
EL+JCB09151XX0 L8 Top
EL+JCB09152XX0 L9 Top
EL+JCB09152XX0 L10 Top
EL+JCB09152XX0 L11 Top
EL+JCB09152XX0 L12 Top
EL+JCB09152XX0 L13 Top
EL+JCB09152XX0 L14 Bottom
EL+68U1.52AXX0 L15 Top
EL+JCB09152XX0 L16 Top
EL+JCB09151XX0 L17 Top
EL+JCB09151XX0 L18 Top
EL+JCB09151XX0 L19 Bottom
EL+JCB09151XX0 L20 Bottom
EL+JCB09151XX0 L21 Bottom
EL+JCB09151XX0 L22 Bottom
EL+JCB09151XX0 L23 Bottom
EL+JCB09151XX0 L24 Bottom
EL+JCB09151XX0 L25 Top
EL+JCB09151XX0 L26 Top
EL+JCB09151XX0 L27 Bottom
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED MH1 Top
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED MH2 Top
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED MH3 Top
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED MH4 Top
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED MH5 Top
MTHOLE3.2 MH6 Top
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED MH7 Top
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED MH8 Top
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED MH9 Top
NAVADECI_ZNACKA_BUTTERFLY NZ1 Top
NAVADECI_ZNACKA_BUTTERFLY NZ2 Bottom
NAVADECI_ZNACKA_BUTTERFLY NZ3 Top
NAVADECI_ZNACKA_BUTTERFLY NZ4 Bottom
NAVADECI_ZNACKA_BUTTERFLY NZ5 Top
NAVADECI_ZNACKA_BUTTERFLY NZ6 Bottom
NAVADECI_ZNACKA_BUTTERFLY NZ7 Top
NAVADECI_ZNACKA_BUTTERFLY NZ8 Bottom
ER+10R0.1WXXF R1 Top
ER+47R0.1WXXF R2 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R3 Bottom
ER+47K0.1WXXF R4 Bottom
ER+47K0.1WXXF R5 Bottom
ER+4K70.1WXXF R6 Top
ER+0RXX1 R7 Bottom
ER+470R0.1WXXF R8 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R9 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R10 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R11 Bottom
ER+470R0.1WXXF R12 Bottom
ER+470R0.1WXXF R13 Bottom
ER+470R0.1WXXF R14 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R15 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R16 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R17 Bottom
ER+4K70.1WXXF R18 Bottom
028-65shcpu103z2

ER+4K70.1WXXF R19 Bottom


ER+4K70.1WXXF R20 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R21 Bottom
ER+470R0.1WXXF R22 Bottom
ER+470R0.1WXXF R23 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R24 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R25 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R26 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R27 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R28 Bottom
ER+4K70.1WXXF R29 Bottom
ER+100R0.1WXXF R30 Top
ER+100R0.1WXXF R31 Top
ER+100R0.1WXXF R32 Top
ER+100R0.1WXXF R33 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R38 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R39 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R40 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R41 Top
ER+220R0.1WXXF R42 Top
ER+220R0.1WXXF R43 Top
ER+220R0.1WXXF R44 Top
ER+220R0.1WXXF R45 Top
ER+220R0.1WXXF R46 Top
ER+220R0.1WXXF R47 Top
ER+220R0.1WXXF R48 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R49 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R50 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R51 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R52 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R53 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R54 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R55 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R56 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R57 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R58 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R59 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R60 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R61 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R62 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R63 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R64 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R65 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R66 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R67 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R68 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R69 Top
ER+47R0.1WXXF R70 Top
ER+47R0.1WXXF R71 Top
ER+47R0.1WXXF R72 Top
ER+47R0.1WXXF R73 Top
ER+47R0.1WXXF R74 Top
ER+0RXX1 R75 Bottom
ER+47R0.1WXXF R76 Top
ER+47R0.1WXXF R77 Top
ER+47R0.1WXXF R78 Top
028-65shcpu103z2

ER+47R0.1WXXF R79 Top


ER+47R0.1WXXF R80 Top
ER+47R0.1WXXF R81 Top
ER+47R0.1WXXF R82 Top
ER+47R0.1WXXF R83 Top
ER+47R0.1WXXF R84 Top
ER+47R0.1WXXF R85 Top
ER+0RXX1 R86 Top
ER+0RXX1 R87 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R88 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R89 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R90 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R91 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R92 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R93 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R94 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R95 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R96 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R97 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R98 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R99 Top
ER+10R0.1WXXF R100 Top
ER+4R70.1WXX1 R101 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R102 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R103 Top
ER+100K0.1WXXF R104 Top
ER+1M0.1WXXF R105 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R106 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R107 Top
ER+1M0.1WXXF R108 Top
ER+1M0.1WXXF R109 Top
ER+0RXX1 R110 Top
ER+0RXX1 R111 Top
ER+1M0.1WXXF R112 Top
ER+0RXX1 R113 Top
ER+1M0.1WXXF R114 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R115 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R116 Top
ER+220R0.1WXXF R117 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R118 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R119 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R120 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R121 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R122 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R123 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R124 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R125 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R126 Top
ER+220R0.1WXXF R127 Top
ER+100K0.1WXXB R128 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R129 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R130 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R131 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R132 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R133 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R134 Top
028-65shcpu103z2

ER+4K70.1WXXF R135 Top


ER+4K70.1WXXF R136 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R137 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R138 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R139 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R140 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R141 Top
ER+1M0.1WXXF R142 Top
ER+10R0.1WXXF R143 Bottom
ER+0RXX1 R144 Bottom
ER+4K70.1WXXF R145 Top
ER+100R0.1WXXF R146 Top
ER+2K20.1WXXF R147 Top
ER+10R0.1WXXF R148 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R149 Top
ER+2K20.1WXXF R150 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R151 Top
ER+0RXX1 R152 Bottom
ER+1K0.1WXXF R153 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R154 Top
ER+0RXX1 R155 Bottom
ER+47K0.1WXXF R156 Top
ER+100R0.1WXXF R157 Top
ER+100R0.1WXXF R158 Top
ER+47R0.1WXXF R159 Top
ER+47R0.1WXXF R160 Top
ER+47R0.1WXXF R161 Top
ER+47R0.1WXXF R162 Top
ER+1K0.1WXXF R163 Top
ER+100R0.1WXXF R164 Bottom
ER+470R0.1WXXF R165 Bottom
ER+470R0.1WXXF R166 Top
ER+1K0.1WXXF R167 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R168 Top
ER+1K0.1WXXF R169 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXB R170 Top
ER+0RXX1 R171 Bottom
ER+0RXX1 R172 Bottom
ER+100R0.1WXXF R173 Top
ER+47R0.1WXXF R174 Top
ER+47R0.1WXXF R175 Top
ER+47R0.1WXXF R176 Bottom
ER+47R0.1WXXF R177 Bottom
ER+47R0.1WXXF R178 Top
ER+47R0.1WXXF R179 Top
ER+47R0.1WXXF R180 Bottom
ER+47R0.1WXXF R181 Bottom
ER+47R0.1WXXF R182 Top
ER+47R0.1WXXF R183 Top
ER+47R0.1WXXF R184 Bottom
ER+47R0.1WXXF R185 Bottom
ER+47R0.1WXXF R186 Top
ER+47R0.1WXXF R187 Top
ER+47R0.1WXXF R188 Bottom
ER+47R0.1WXXF R189 Bottom
ER+47R0.1WXXF R190 Top
028-65shcpu103z2

ER+47R0.1WXXF R191 Top


ER+470R0.1WXXF R192 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R193 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R194 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R195 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R196 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R197 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R198 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R199 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R200 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R201 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R202 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R203 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R204 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R205 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R206 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R207 Bottom
ER+4K70.1WXXF R208 Bottom
ER+470R0.1WXXF R209 Bottom
ER+4K70.1WXXF R210 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R211 Bottom
ER+4K70.1WXXF R212 Bottom
ER+4K70.1WXXF R213 Bottom
ER+4K70.1WXXF R214 Bottom
ER+470R0.1WXXF R215 Bottom
ER+22K0.1WXXF R216 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R217 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R218 Top
ER+22K0.1WXXF R219 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R220 Bottom
ER+4K70.1WXXF R221 Bottom
ER+4K70.1WXXF R222 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R223 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R224 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R225 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R226 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R227 Top
ER+0RXX1 R228 Top
ER+0RXX1 R229 Top
ER+0RXX1 R230 Top
ER+47R0.1WXXF R231 Top
ER+47R0.1WXXF R232 Top
ER+0RXX1 R233 Top
ER+0RXX1 R234 Top
ER+1K0.1WXXF R235 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R236 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R237 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R262 Top
ER+100R0.1WXXF R263 Top
ER+100R0.1WXXF R264 Bottom
ER+10R0.1WXXF R265 Bottom
ER+10R0.1WXXF R266 Bottom
ER+10R0.1WXXF R267 Bottom
ER+10R0.1WXXF R268 Bottom
ER+10R0.1WXXF R269 Bottom
ER+10R0.1WXXF R270 Bottom
028-65shcpu103z2

ER+10R0.1WXXF R271 Bottom


ER+10R0.1WXXF R272 Bottom
ER+0RXX1 R273 Top
ER+0RXX1 R274 Top
ER+0RXX1 R275 Bottom
ER+47K0.1WXXF R276 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R277 Top
ER+1K0.1WXXF R278 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R279 Bottom
ER+0RXX1 R280 Bottom
ER+10R0.1WXXF R281 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R282 Top
ER+100K0.1WXXB R283 Top
ER+10R0.1WXXF R284 Bottom
ERT+KTY82220PH0 RT1 Bottom
ESP-KPE112XX0 SP1 Bottom
ESW+LSH1301XX0 SW1 Bottom
ESW+LSH1301XX0 SW2 Bottom
ESW+LSH1301XX0 SW3 Bottom
ESW+LSH1301XX0 SW4 Bottom
ESW+LSH1301XX0 SW5 Bottom
ESW+LSH1301XX0 SW6 Bottom
ESW+LSH1301XX0 SW7 Bottom
ESW+LSH1301XX0 SW9 Bottom
ESW+LSH1301XX0 SW10 Bottom
SESAZOVACI_ZNACKA SZ1 Top
SESAZOVACI_ZNACKA SZ2 Top
SESAZOVACI_ZNACKA SZ3 Top
TP_GND_4.0MM TP1 Top
TEST_POINT TP2 Top
TEST_POINT TP3 Top
TEST_POINT TP4 Top
TEST_POINT TP5 Top
TEST_POINT TP7 Top
TEST_POINT TP8 Top
TEST_POINT TP9 Top
TEST_POINT TP10 Top
TEST_POINT TP11 Top
TEST_POINT TP12 Top
TEST_POINT TP13 Top
TEST_POINT TP14 Top
TEST_POINT TP15 Top
TEST_POINT TP16 Top
TEST_POINT TP17 Top
TEST_POINT TP18 Top
TEST_POINT TP19 Top
TP_GND_4.0MM TP20 Top
TEST_POINT TP21 Top
TEST_POINT TP22 Top
TEST_POINT TP23 Top
TEST_POINT TP24 Top
TEST_POINT TP25 Top
TEST_POINT TP26 Top
TEST_POINT TP27 Top
TEST_POINT TP28 Top
TEST_POINT TP29 Top
028-65shcpu103z2

TEST_POINT TP30 Top


TEST_POINT TP31 Top
TEST_POINT TP32 Top
TEST_POINT TP33 Top
TEST_POINT TP34 Top
TEST_POINT TP35 Top
TEST_POINT TP36 Top
TEST_POINT TP37 Top
TEST_POINT TP38 Top
TEST_POINT TP39 Top
TEST_POINT TP40 Top
EU+MT48LC8MXX0 U1 Top
EU+LM25955.0XX0 U16 Top
EU+LM1117ADJXX0 U17 Top
EU+ST232CDXX0 U18 Top
UZEL_1_1 UZ1 Top
UZEL_1_1 UZ2 Top
UZEL_UP1_3 UZ3 Top
UZEL_DOWN1_3 UZ4 Top
UZEL_UP1_4 UZ6 Top
EX+32.768KXX0 X1 Top
EX+9.216MXX0 X2 Top
028-65power102z2

PART TYPE Reference Side


ECE-330U35VXXM CE1 Top
ECE-330U35VXXM CE2 Top
ECE-330U35VXXM CE3 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK2 Top
ECK+10N50VXXZ CK3 Top
ECK-470PX1Y2XXM CK4 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK5 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK6 Top
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK7 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK8 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK9 Top
ECK-1N0X1Y1XXM CK10 Top
ECK-2N2X1Y2XXM CK11 Top
ECK+100P50VXXJ CK12 Top
ECK+220P50VXXJ CK13 Top
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK14 Top
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK15 Top
ECK+100P50VXXJ CK16 Top
ECK+470P50VXXJ CK17 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK18 Top
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK19 Top
ECK+10N50VXXZ CK20 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK21 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK27 Top
ECK-470PX1Y2XXM CK28 Top
ECK-100PX1Y1XXM CK29 Top
ECK-100N63VXXM CK30 Top
ECK-100N63VXXM CK31 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK32 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK43 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK44 Top
ECK+47P50VXXJ CK45 Top
ED-FR604XX0 D1 Top
ED+US1G400VXX0 D2 Top
ED-BYV29400XX0 D7 Top
EDS+SS16XX0 D9 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD1 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD2 Top
EF-MST6.3ASC0 F1 Top
EF-MST6.3ASC0 F2 Top
EF-MST4.0ASC0 F3 Top
EF-MST2.5ASC0 F4 Top
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED H1 Top
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED H2 Top
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED H3 Top
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED H4 Top
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED H5 Top
MTHOLE3.2 H6 Top
MTHOLE3.2 H7 Top
MTHOLE3.2 H8 Top
MTHOLE3.2 H9 Top
MTHOLE3.2 H10 Top
MTHOLE3.2 H11 Top
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED H12 Top
MTHOLE3.2 H13 Top
028-65power102z2

MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED H14 Top


MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED H15 Top
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED H16 Top
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED H17 Top
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED H18 Top
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED H19 Top
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED H20 Top
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED H21 Top
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED H22 Top
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED H23 Top
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED H24 Top
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED H25 Top
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED H26 Top
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED H27 Top
MTHOLE3.2 H28 Top
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED H29 Top
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED H30 Top
MTHOLE3.2 H31 Top
EJ-B03-VHJS0 J1 Top
EJ-B02-VHJS0 J2 Top
EJ-B03-VHJS0 J3 Top
EJ-B03-VHJS0 J4 Top
EJ-89400-07XX0 J5 Top
EJ-BAN2XX0 J6 Top
EJ-BAN2XX0 J7 Top
EJ-BAN2XX0 J8 Top
EJ-BAN2XX0 J9 Top
EJ-BAN2XX0 J10 Top
EJ-BAN2XX0 J11 Top
EJ-BAN2XX0 J12 Top
EJ-BAN2XX0 J13 Top
EJ-B03-VHJS0 J14 Top
EJ-B02-VHJS0 J15 Top
EJ-89400-07XX0 J16 Top
EJ+JUMPERXX0 J18 Top
EJ-S1G2XX0 J19 Top
EJ-89400-07XX0 J20 Top
EJ-5281-NA4MX0 J21 Top
EL+10U4AXX0 L1 Top
EL+10U4AXX0 L2 Top
EL+10U4AXX0 L3 Top
EL+10U4AXX0 L4 Top
EL-PMEC0.5MXX0 L9 Top
NAVADECI_ZNACKA_BUTTERFLY NZ1 Top
NAVADECI_ZNACKA_BUTTERFLY NZ2 Top
NAVADECI_ZNACKA_BUTTERFLY NZ3 Top
EO+PC817XX0 O1 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R1 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R2 Top
ER+1K0.1WXXF R3 Top
ER+100K0.1WXXF R4 Top
ER+10R0.1WXXF R5 Top
ER+47R0.1WXXF R6 Top
ER-0.16R0.6WXX0 R21 Top
ER-0.16R0.6WXX0 R22 Top
ER-0.16R0.6WXX0 R23 Top
028-65power102z2

ER+100K0.1WXXF R24 Top


ER+47R0.1WXXF R25 Top
ER+220R0.1WXXF R26 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R27 Top
ER-0.16R0.6WXX0 R28 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R29 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R30 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R31 Top
ER+10R0.1WXXF R32 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R33 Top
ER+470K0.1WXXF R34 Top
ER+22K0.1WXXF R35 Top
ER+220K0.1WXXF R36 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R37 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R38 Top
ER+100K0.1WXXB R39 Top
ER+0RXX1 R40 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R51 Top
ER+22K0.1WXXF R52 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R53 Top
ER+0RXX1 R54 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R55 Top
ER+0RXX1 R56 Top
ER+1K0.1WXXF R57 Top
ER+0RXX1 R58 Top
ER+100K0.1WXXB R59 Top
ER+10R0.1WXXF R60 Top
ER+0RXX1 R61 Top
ER+0RXX1 R62 Top
ER+100K0.1WXXB R63 Top
ER+2K20.1WXXF R64 Top
ER+100K0.1WXXF R65 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R66 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R67 Top
ER+1K0.1WXXF R68 Top
ER+220K0.1WXXF R69 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R70 Top
ER+10R0.1WXXF R71 Top
ER+0RXX1 R72 Top
ER+220K0.1WXXF R73 Top
ER+22K1WXXJ R74 Top
ER+47R0.1WXXF R75 Top
ER+47R0.1WXXF R76 Top
ER+220K0.1WXXF R77 Top
ER+10R0.1WXXF R78 Top
ER+0RXX1 R79 Top
ER+0RXX1 R80 Top
ER+0RXX1 R81 Top
ER+0RXX1 R82 Top
ER+0RXX1 R83 Top
ER+100K0.1WXXF R84 Top
ER+47R0.1WXXF R85 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R86 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R87 Top
ER+2K20.1WXXF R88 Top
ER+10R0.1WXXF R89 Top
028-65power102z2

ER+220K0.1WXXF R90 Top


ER-47R0.6WXXF R91 Top
ER+0RXX1 R92 Top
ER+22K1WXXJ R93 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R94 Top
ER+2K20.1WXXF R95 Top
ER+1K0.1WXXF R96 Top
ER+0RXX1 R97 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R98 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R99 Top
SESAZOVACI_ZNACKA SZ1 Top
SESAZOVACI_ZNACKA SZ2 Top
SESAZOVACI_ZNACKA SZ3 Top
TEST_POINT X1 Top
TEST_POINT X2 Top
TEST_POINT X3 Top
TP_GND_4.0MM X4 Top
TEST_POINT X5 Top
TEST_POINT X6 Top
TEST_POINT X7 Top
TEST_POINT X8 Top
TEST_POINT X9 Top
TEST_POINT X10 Top
TEST_POINT X11 Top
TEST_POINT X12 Top
TEST_POINT X13 Top
TEST_POINT X14 Top
TEST_POINT X15 Top
TEST_POINT X16 Top
TP_GND_4.0MM X17 Top
TEST_POINT X18 Top
TEST_POINT X20 Top
028-65disp101

PART TYPE Reference Side


EDL-3MMGREENXX0 DL1 Bottom
EDL-3MMGREENXX0 DL2 Bottom
EJ-85503XX0 J1 Top
EJ-MLW26AXX0 J3 Top
ELDD-ELF512EV0 LDD1 Bottom
ELDD-ELF512EV0 LDD2 Bottom
EPAT-SIL10PZXX0 PAT1
EPAT-SIL10PZXX0 PAT2
EPAT-SIL10PZXX0 PAT3
EPAT-SIL10PZXX0 PAT4
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED MH1 Top
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED MH2 Top
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED MH3 Top
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED MH4 Top
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED MH5 Top
NAVADECI_ZNACKA_BUTTERFLY NZ1 Top
NAVADECI_ZNACKA_BUTTERFLY NZ2 Top
NAVADECI_ZNACKA_BUTTERFLY NZ3 Top
NAVADECI_ZNACKA_BUTTERFLY NZ4 Top
NAVADECI_ZNACKA_BUTTERFLY NZ5 Bottom
NAVADECI_ZNACKA_BUTTERFLY NZ6 Bottom
NAVADECI_ZNACKA_BUTTERFLY NZ7 Bottom
NAVADECI_ZNACKA_BUTTERFLY NZ8 Bottom
ER+470R0.1WXXF R1 Bottom
ER+470R0.1WXXF R2 Bottom
ER-470R0.6WXXF R3 Bottom
ER-470R0.6WXXF R4 Bottom
ESW+LSH1301XX0 SW1 Bottom
ESW+LSH1301XX0 SW2 Bottom
ESW+LSH1301XX0 SW3 Bottom
ESW-PB1720XX1 SW4 Bottom
ESW-PB1720XX1 SW5 Bottom
ESW-PB1720XX1 SW6 Bottom
SESAZOVACI_ZNACKA SZ1 Top
SESAZOVACI_ZNACKA SZ2 Top
SESAZOVACI_ZNACKA SZ3 Top
TEST_POINT TP1 Top
TP_GND_4.0MM TP2 Top
TEST_POINT TP3 Top
TP_GND_4.0MM TP4 Top
TP_GND_4.0MM TP5 Top
037-65gener151

PART TYPE Reference Side


ECE-330U35VXXT CE1 Top
ECE-330U35VXXT CE2 Top
ECE-330U35VXXT CE3 Top
ECE-330U35VXXT CE4 Top
ECE-100U160VXXM CE5 Top
ECE-100U160VXXM CE6 Top
ECE-100U160VXXM CE7 Top
ECE+10U35VXXM CE25 Top
ECE+10U35VXXM CE26 Top
ECE+10U35VXXM CE27 Top
ECE+10U35VXXM CE28 Top
ECE+10U35VXXM CE29 Top
ECE+10U35VXXM CE30 Top
ECE+10U35VXXM CE31 Top
ECE+10U35VXXM CE32 Top
ECE+10U35VXXM CE33 Top
ECF-1N1.6KVXXK CF1 Top
ECF-47N275VXXM CF2 Top
ECF-1N1.6KVXXK CF3 Top
ECF-47N275VXXM CF4 Top
ECF-47N275VXXM CF5 Top
ECF-1N1.6KVXXK CF6 Top
ECF-1N1.6KVXXK CF7 Top
ECF-1N1.6KVXXK CF8 Top
ECF-1N1.6KVXXK CF9 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK1 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK2 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK3 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK4 Top
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK5 Top
ECK-100P500VXXK CK6 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK7 Top
ECK-100P500VXXK CK8 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK9 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK10 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK11 Top
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK12 Top
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK13 Top
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK14 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK15 Top
ECK+100P50VXXJ CK16 Top
ECK+100P50VXXJ CK17 Top
ECK-100P500VXXK CK18 Top
ECK-100P500VXXK CK19 Top
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK20 Top
ECK+10N50VXXZ CK21 Top
ECK+10N50VXXZ CK22 Top
ECK+10N50VXXZ CK23 Top
ECK+10N50VXXZ CK24 Top
ECK+10N50VXXZ CK25 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK26 Top
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK27 Top
ECK+10N50VXXZ CK28 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK29 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK30 Top
037-65gener151

ECK+100N50VXXZ CK55 Top


ECK+1N50VXXJ CK56 Top
ECK+22P50VXXJ CK57 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK58 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK59 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK60 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK61 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK62 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK63 Top
ECK+10N50VXXZ CK64 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK65 Top
ECK+100P50VXXJ CK66 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK67 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK68 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK69 Top
ECK+10N50VXXZ CK70 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK71 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK72 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK73 Top
ECK+10N50VXXZ CK74 Top
ECK+10N50VXXZ CK75 Top
ECK+10N50VXXZ CK76 Top
ECK+10N50VXXZ CK77 Top
ECK+10N50VXXZ CK78 Top
ECK+10N50VXXZ CK79 Top
ECK+10N50VXXZ CK80 Top
ECK+10N50VXXZ CK81 Top
ECK+10N50VXXZ CK82 Top
ECK+10N50VXXZ CK83 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK84 Top
ECK+100P50VXXJ CK85 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK86 Top
ECK+10N50VXXZ CK87 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK88 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK89 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK90 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK91 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK92 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK93 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK94 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK95 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK96 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK97 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK98 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK99 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK100 Top
ECK+22P50VXXJ CK101 Top
ECK+10N50VXXZ CK102 Top
ECK+1N50VXXJ CK103 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK104 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK105 Top
ECK+22P50VXXJ CK106 Top
ECK+22P50VXXJ CK107 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK108 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK109 Top
ECK+100N50VXXZ CK110 Top
037-65gener151

ED+US1G400VXX0 D1 Top
ED+US1G400VXX0 D2 Top
ED+US1G400VXX0 D3 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD1 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD2 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD3 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD4 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD5 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD6 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD7 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD8 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD9 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD10 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD11 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD12 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD13 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD14 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD15 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD16 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD17 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD18 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD19 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD20 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD21 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD22 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD23 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD24 Top
EDD+BAV99XX0 DD25 Top
EDL+SMDYELOWXX0 DL1 Top
EJ-MLW10GXX0 J6 Top
EL-3UXXM L1 Top
EL-6UXXM L2 Top
EL+JCB09152XX0 L3 Top
EL+JCB09152XX0 L4 Top
EL+JCB09151XX0 L5 Top
EL-0.2UXX0 L6 Top
EL-0.2UXX0 L7 Top
EL-0.2UXX0 L8 Top
EL+JCB09151XX0 L9 Top
EL+JCB09151XX0 L10 Top
EL+JCB09151XX0 L11 Top
EL+JCB09151XX0 L12 Top
EL+330U0.68AXX0 L13 Top
EL-3UXXM L14 Top
EL+JCB09151XX0 L15 Top
EL+JCB09151XX0 L16 Top
EL+220U0.66AXX0 L17 Top
EL+JCB09151XX0 L18 Top
EL-6UXXM L19 Top
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED MH2 Top
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED MH3 Top
MTHOLE3.2_NONPLATED MH4 Top
NAVADECI_ZNACKA_BUTTERFLY N1 Top
NAVADECI_ZNACKA_CIRCLE N2 Top
NAVADECI_ZNACKA_BUTTERFLY N3 Top
NAVADECI_ZNACKA_DIAMOND N4 Top
037-65gener151

NAVADECI_ZNACKA_CIRCLE N5 Top
NAVADECI_ZNACKA_DIAMOND N6 Top
NAVADECI_ZNACKA_BUTTERFLY N7 Top
NAVADECI_ZNACKA_CIRCLE N8 Top
NAVADECI_ZNACKA_DIAMOND N9 Top
EO+PC817XX0 O1 Top
EO+H11L1VXX0 O2 Top
EO+PC817XX0 O3 Top
EO+H11L1VXX0 O4 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R1 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R2 Top
ER+22K0.1WXXF R3 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R4 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R5 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R6 Top
ER+220R0.1WXXF R7 Top
ER+220R0.1WXXF R8 Top
ER+100K0.1WXXF R9 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R10 Top
ER+10R0.1WXXF R11 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R12 Top
ER+10R0.1WXXF R13 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R14 Top
ER+10R0.1WXXF R15 Top
ER+10R0.1WXXF R16 Top
ER+220R0.1WXXF R17 Top
ER+220R0.1WXXF R18 Top
ER+10R0.1WXXF R19 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R20 Top
ER-0.16R0.6WXX0 R21 Top
ER-0.16R0.6WXX0 R22 Top
ER-0.16R0.6WXX0 R23 Top
ER+10R0.1WXXF R24 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R25 Top
ER+1K0.1WXXF R26 Top
ER+1K0.1WXXF R27 Top
ER+220R0.1WXXF R28 Top
ER+220R0.1WXXF R29 Top
ER+10R0.1WXXF R30 Top
ER+10R0.1WXXF R31 Top
ER+47R0.1WXXF R32 Top
ER+10R0.1WXXF R33 Top
ER+10R0.1WXXF R34 Top
ER+10R0.1WXXF R35 Top
ER+10R0.1WXXF R36 Top
ER+10R0.1WXXF R37 Top
ER+10R0.1WXXF R38 Top
ER+10R0.1WXXF R39 Top
ER+10R0.1WXXF R40 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R41 Top
ER+10R0.1WXXF R42 Top
ER+10R0.1WXXF R43 Top
ER+47R1WXXJ R44 Top
ER+47R1WXXJ R45 Top
ER+47R1WXXJ R46 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R47 Top
037-65gener151

ER+100K0.1WXXF R48 Top


ER+100K0.1WXXF R49 Top
ER+100K0.1WXXF R50 Top
ER+100K0.1WXXF R51 Top
ER+10R0.1WXXF R52 Top
ER+47R0.1WXXF R53 Top
ER+1K0.1WXXF R54 Top
ER+100R0.1WXXF R55 Top
ER+1K0.1WXXF R56 Top
ER+47R1WXXJ R57 Top
ER+47R1WXXJ R58 Top
ER+47R1WXXJ R59 Top
ER+47R1WXXJ R60 Top
ER+10R0.1WXXF R61 Top
ER+47R1WXXJ R62 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R63 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R64 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R65 Top
ER+22K0.1WXXF R66 Top
ER+1K0.1WXXF R67 Top
ER+2K20.1WXXF R68 Top
ER+1M0.1WXXF R69 Top
ER+22K0.1WXXF R70 Top
ER+100K0.1WXXF R71 Top
ER+220K0.1WXXF R72 Top
ER+22K0.1WXXF R73 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R74 Top
ER+2K20.1WXXF R75 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R76 Top
ER+2K20.1WXXF R77 Top
ER+1K0.1WXXF R78 Top
ER+2K20.1WXXF R79 Top
ER+47R1WXXJ R80 Top
ER+1K0.1WXXF R81 Top
ER+1K0.1WXXF R82 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R83 Top
ER+2K20.1WXXF R84 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R85 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R86 Top
ER+47R1WXXJ R87 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R88 Top
ER+22K0.1WXXF R89 Top
ER+22K0.1WXXF R90 Top
ER+220R0.1WXXF R91 Top
ER+220R0.1WXXF R92 Top
ER+1M0.1WXXF R128 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R129 Top
ER+1K0.1WXXF R130 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R131 Top
ER+1M0.1WXXF R132 Top
ER+100R0.1WXXF R133 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R134 Top
ER+1K0.1WXXF R135 Top
ER+2K20.1WXXF R136 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R137 Top
ER+1K0.1WXXF R138 Top
037-65gener151

ER+2K20.1WXXF R139 Top


ER+10K0.1WXXF R140 Top
ER+1K0.1WXXF R141 Top
ER+2K20.1WXXF R142 Top
ER+22K0.1WXXF R143 Top
ER+22K0.1WXXF R144 Top
ER+10R0.1WXXF R145 Top
ER+10R0.1WXXF R146 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R147 Top
ER+100R0.1WXXF R148 Top
ER+220R0.1WXXF R149 Top
ER+1K0.1WXXF R150 Top
ER+1K0.1WXXF R151 Top
ER+100R0.1WXXF R152 Top
ER+100R0.1WXXF R153 Top
ER+2K20.1WXXF R154 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R155 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R156 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R157 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R158 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R159 Top
ER+2K20.1WXXF R160 Top
ER+1K0.1WXXF R161 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R162 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R163 Top
ER+2K20.1WXXF R164 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R165 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R166 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R167 Top
ER+100R0.1WXXF R168 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R169 Top
ER+2K20.1WXXF R170 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R171 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R172 Top
ER+22K0.1WXXF R173 Top
ER+2K20.1WXXF R174 Top
ER+220K0.1WXXF R175 Top
ER+22K0.1WXXF R176 Top
ER+1K0.1WXXF R177 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R178 Top
ER+47K0.1WXXF R179 Top
ER+100R0.1WXXF R180 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R181 Top
ER+2K20.1WXXF R182 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R183 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R184 Top
ER+22K0.1WXXF R185 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R186 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R187 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R188 Top
ER+22K0.1WXXF R189 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R190 Top
ER+220R0.1WXXF R191 Top
ER+220R0.1WXXF R192 Top
ER+220R0.1WXXF R193 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R194 Top
037-65gener151

ER+10K0.1WXXF R195 Top


ER+220R0.1WXXF R196 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R197 Top
ER+220R0.1WXXF R198 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R199 Top
ER+4K70.1WXXF R200 Top
ER+220R0.1WXXF R201 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R202 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R203 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R204 Top
ER+1K0.1WXXF R205 Top
ER+100R0.1WXXF R206 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R207 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R208 Top
ER+100R0.1WXXF R209 Top
ER+10K0.1WXXF R210 Top
ER+2K20.1WXXF R211 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R212 Top
ER+470R0.1WXXF R213 Top
ER+220R0.1WXXF R214 Top
ERL-H820F12XX0 RL1 Top
ERL-M3S12TXX0 RL2 Top
ERL-M3S12TXX0 RL3 Top
ERL-LI121A85ME0 RL4 Top
ERL-H820F12XX0 RL5 Top
ERT+KTY82220PH0 RT1 Top
SESAZOVACI_ZNACKA S1 Top
SESAZOVACI_ZNACKA S2 Top
SESAZOVACI_ZNACKA S3 Top
TEST_POINT TP1 Top
TEST_POINT TP2 Top
TEST_POINT TP3 Top
TEST_POINT TP4 Top
TEST_POINT TP5 Top
TEST_POINT TP6 Top
TEST_POINT TP7 Top
TEST_POINT TP8 Top
TEST_POINT TP9 Top
TEST_POINT TP10 Top
TEST_POINT TP11 Top
TEST_POINT TP12 Top
TEST_POINT TP13 Top
TEST_POINT TP14 Top
TEST_POINT TP15 Top
TEST_POINT TP16 Top
TEST_POINT TP17 Top
TEST_POINT TP18 Top
TEST_POINT TP19 Top
ETR-100V-10PXX0 TR1 Top
ETR+IIC10FR0 TR2 Top
ETR+IIC10FR0 TR3 Top
UZEL_1_1 UZ1 Top
UZEL_1_1 UZ2 Top
UZEL_1_1 UZ3 Top
UZEL_1_1 UZ4 Top
UZEL_1_1 UZ5 Top
037-65gener151

UZEL_1_1 UZ6 Top


UZEL_1_1 UZ7 Top
UZEL_1_1 UZ8 Top
EX+18.432MXX0 X1 Top
J4
028-gener100z1

Placing of generatos, cables and blinds


/inside view of unit/

output 6 output 5
MEC 106 MEC 105
J16 at M028-52POWERxxx J20 at M028-52POWERxxx

output 4 output 3 output 2 output 1


MEC MEC MEC MEC
104 103 102 101

Position 2 MEC2

Position 1 MEC1

Marking of connectors on the generators:

M031-52GENERxxx L
channel A J1
channel B J2
acupuncture J3
door J4

M036-52GENERxxx E
pat. output J2
sync IN J5
sync OUT J4

M037-52GENERxxx S
M037-52GEN2Mxxx T
channel A J2
channel B J3
electro IN J4
electro OUT J5

Page 1 of 4 AM23/04/2004
028-gener100z1

2610, 2615, 2621 OPTI M026-S2610100

output 1 output 2 output 3 output 4 output 5 output 6


E1 Position 1 E1-J2
Position 2

2620, 2625 OPTI M026-S2620100

output 1 output 2 output 3 output 4 output 5 output 6


E1 Position 1 E1-J2
E2 Position 2 E2-J2
Interconnect by cable K300-5521100 from J4/E1 to J5/E2.

2110 OPTI M021-S2110100

output 1 output 2 output 3 output 4 output 5 output 6


L1 Position 1 L1A-J1 L1B-J2 door-J4 acup-J3
Position 2

2120 OPTI M021-S2120100

output 1 output 2 output 3 output 4 output 5 output 6


L1 Position 1 L1A-J1 L1B-J2 door-J4
L2 Position 2 L2A-J1

2710 OPTI M027-S2710100

output 1 output 2 output 3 output 4 output 5 output 6


S1 Position 1 S1A-J2 S1B-J3 Ein-J4 Eout-J5
Position 2

2210 OPTI M027-S2210100

output 1 output 2 output 3 output 4 output 5 output 6


T1 Position 1 T1A-J2 T1B-J3 Ein-J4 Eout-J5
Position 2

2810S, 2815S, 2821S OPTI M028-S2810S100

output 1 output 2 output 3 output 4 output 5 output 6


E1 Position 1
S1 Position 2 S1A-J2 S1B-J3 Eout-J5
Interconnect by cable K038-5501100 from J2/E1 to J4/S1.

Page 2 of 4 AM23/04/2004
028-gener100z1
2810T, 2815T, 2821T OPTI M028-S2810T100

output 1 output 2 output 3 output 4 output 5 output 6


E1 Position 1
T1 Position 2 T1A-J2 T1B-J3 Eout-J5
Interconnect by cable K038-5501100 from J2/E1 to J4/T1.

2810L, 2815L, 2821L OPTI M028-S2810L100

output 1 output 2 output 3 output 4 output 5 output 6


E1 Position 1 E1-J2
L1 Position 2 L1A-J1 L1B-J2 door-J4

2800SL OPTI M028-S2800SL100

output 1 output 2 output 3 output 4 output 5 output 6


S1 Position 1 S1A-J2 S1B-J3
L1 Position 2 door-J4 L1A-J1

2800TL OPTI M028-S2800TL100

output 1 output 2 output 3 output 4 output 5 output 6


T1 Position 1 T1A-J2 T1B-J3
L1 Position 2 door-J4 L1A-J1

4610, 4615, 4621 PROFI M026-S4610100

output 1 output 2 output 3 output 4 output 5 output 6


E1 Position 1 E1-J2
Position 2

4620, 4625,4640 PROFI M026-S4620100

output 1 output 2 output 3 output 4 output 5 output 6


E1 Position 1 E1-J2
E2 Position 2 E2-J2
Interconnect by cable K300-5521100 from J4/E1 to J5/E2.

4110 PROFI M021-S4110100

output 1 output 2 output 3 output 4 output 5 output 6


L1 Position 1 L1A-J1 L1B-J2 door-J4 acup-J3
Position 2

Page 3 of 4 AM23/04/2004
028-gener100z1
4120 PROFI M021-S4120100

output 1 output 2 output 3 output 4 output 5 output 6


L1 Position 1 L1A-J1 L1B-J2 door-J4
L2 Position 2 L2A-J1

4710 PROFI M027-S4710100

output 1 output 2 output 3 output 4 output 5 output 6


S1 Position 1 S1A-J2 S1B-J3 Ein-J4 Eout-J5
Position 2

4210 PROFI M027-S4210100

output 1 output 2 output 3 output 4 output 5 output 6


T1 Position 1 T1A-J2 T1B-J3 Ein-J4 Eout-J5
Position 2

4810S, 4815S, 4821S PROFI M028-S4810S100

output 1 output 2 output 3 output 4 output 5 output 6


E1 Position 1
S1 Position 2 S1A-J2 S1B-J3 Eout-J5
Interconnect by cable K038-5501100 from J2/E1 to J4/S1.

4810T, 4815T, 4821T PROFI M028-S4810T100

output 1 output 2 output 3 output 4 output 5 output 6


E1 Position 1
T1 Position 2 T1A-J2 T1B-J3 Eout-J5
Interconnect by cable K038-5501100 from J2/E1 to J4/T1.

4810L, 4815L, 4821L PROFI M028-S4810L100

output 1 output 2 output 3 output 4 output 5 output 6


E1 Position 1 E1-J2
L1 Position 2 L1A-J1 L1B-J2 door-J4

4800SL PROFI M028-S4800SL100

output 1 output 2 output 3 output 4 output 5 output 6


S1 Position 1 S1A-J2 S1B-J3
L1 Position 2 door-J4 L1A-J1

4800TL PROFI M028-S4800TL100

output 1 output 2 output 3 output 4 output 5 output 6


T1 Position 1 T1A-J2 T1B-J3
L1 Position 2 door-J4 L1A-J1

Page 4 of 4 AM23/04/2004
Test protocol 028-96prien100z2
Type of unit: Configuration: Colour of frame:
BTL-4110 [L1] Blue
BTL-4120 [L1, L2] Yellow

BTL-4610 BTL-4615 BTL-4621 [E1]


BTL-4620 BTL-4625 BTL-4640 [E1, E2] Type of HW key:
KEY_MODE_OPTI_BASIC
BTL-4210 [T1] KEY_MODE_OPTI_PLUS
KEY_MODE_OPTI_FULL
BTL-4710 [U1] KEY_MODE_OPTI_BASIC_DIAG
KEY_MODE_OPTI_PLUS_DIAG
BTL-4800 SL [U1, L1] KEY_MODE_OPTI_FULL_DIAG
BTL-4800 TL [T1, L1] KEY_MODE_PROFI_BASIC
KEY_MODE_PROFI_PLUS
BTL-4810 L BTL-4815 L BTL-4821 L [E1, L1] KEY_MODE_PROFI_FULL
BTL-4810 S BTL-4815 S BTL-4821 S [E1, U1]
BTL-4810 T BTL-4815 T BTL-4821 T [E1, T1]

BTL-2110 [L1] Note:


BTL-2120 [L1, L2] Units 2xxx = 4xxx OPTI
Units 4xxx = 4xxx PROFI
BTL-2610 BTL-2615 BTL-2621 [E1]
BTL-2620 BTL-2625 [E1, E2]

BTL-2210 [T1]

BTL-2710 [U1]

BTL-2800 SL [U1, L1]


BTL-2800 TL [T1, L1]

BTL-2810 L BTL-2815 L BTL-2821 L [E1, L1] Protocol issued by:


BTL-2810 S BTL-2815 S BTL-2821 S [E1, U1]
BTL-2810 T BTL-2815 T BTL-2821 T [E1, T1] ....................................................................

DIAG

Serial №: ... 4000–00–....... ................................................................. other – specify: ......................................................................................

Production / Evidence №:....................................................................... Version of firmware (1.06 or greater): .......................................................

Measuring conditions: ambient temperature: ..………........……°C mains voltage (215 to 240V): ............…....……...………….……………….V

Used equipment:
test device TK01 №:...TK01-E.................................................................... HV supply V199-VNZDROJ10x №: ...V199-E..............................................
multimeter TM03 №:...TM03-E................................................................... test electro load №: ...V236-E.......................................................................
ultrasound heads BTL-237 №: ... M237-HEAD1110..... M237-HEAD4110..... M237-HEAD12110..... M237-HEAD42110..................................
ultrasound scales №: ................................................................................................................................................................................................................
test laser probe BTL-448 685 nm №:.....V448-E........................................ test laser probe BTL-448 830 nm №:.....V448-E..........................................
burn-in ultrasound heads, burn-in simulator of laser probe, PC
Other: ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1. Basic setting of device (contrast, language, touch panel, RTC …)................................................................................................... YES NO
2. Burn-in of device. Time of burning:..............................................................................................................................................................................hr
3. Check of leakage currents according to OTP-126
a) Leakage current between patient part A and patient part B: less than 90 µA: ..................................................................................................... µA
b) Leakage current between connector door and patient parts: less than 90 µA (applicable only for units with laser generator): ........................... µA
4. Check of insulation:
a) between L1A and L1B: more than 3 MΩ, standardly more that 19.99 MΩ ............................................................................................................ MΩ
b) between L2A and L2B: more than 3 MΩ, standardly more that 19.99 MΩ ............................................................................................................ MΩ

c) between U1A and U1B: more than 3 MΩ, standardly more that 19.99 MΩ............................................................................................................ MΩ

e) between T1A and T1B: more than 3 MΩ, standardly more that 19.99 MΩ ............................................................................................................ MΩ
5. Check of insulation barriers according to OTP-124
a) Insulation barrier patient part A to patient part B: 3 600 V; less than 5 µA: ......................................................................................................... µA
b) Insulation barrier connector door to patient parts: 4 800 V; less than 5 µA (applicable only for units with laser generator):................................ µA
6. Run ultrasound heads calibration (only for unit configuration containing U1, U2, T1, T2) ............................................ N/A YES NO
7. Run internal final check in unit
a) Check of appearance, LCD and buttons assembly (step 1, 4) .................................................................................................... YES NO
b) Check of mechanical and electrical function of all buttons and encoders (step 2, 3) .................................................................. YES NO
c) The device does not clatter when shaken (step 5) ...................................................................................................................... YES NO
d) Type, serial and safety labels are properly stuck-on (step 6) ...................................................................................................... YES NO
e) Check hard reset function (step 8) ............................................................................................................................................... YES NO

Page 1 of 2 JD24/05/2004
Test protocol 028-96prien100z2

f) Check fan function (step 9) .......................................................................................................................................................... YES NO


g) Check sound generation (step 10)............................................................................................................................................... YES NO
h) Run default setting (step 12) ........................................................................................................................................................ YES NO
i) Check contrast setting (step 14) .................................................................................................................................................. YES NO
j) Check of data and patients storing (step 15) ............................................................................................................................... YES NO

k) Check proper position of all patient outputs (step 19).................................................................................................................. YES NO


l) Check internal connection between electro and ultrasound generator (step 20) (only for
unit configuration containing E1 together with U1 or T1) ........................................................................................... N/A YES NO
m) Run acupuncture test (step 21) (only for unit configuration containing single L1 or L1, L2) ...................................... N/A YES NO
n) Run door test (step 22) (only for unit configuration containing L1 or L2) ................................................................... N/A YES NO
o) Check battery management (step 23) (only for PROFI unit)...................................................................................... N/A YES NO
8. Check output values
a) Check E1 output current +15mA (only for unit configuration containing E1): from 13.5 mA to 16.5 mA .............................................................mA
b) Check E1 output voltage reduction (only for unit configuration containing E1): from 75 mA to 99 mA................................................................mA
c) Check E1 output voltage -15V (only for unit configuration containing E1): from -16.5 V to -13.5 V .......................................................................V

d) Check E2 output current +15mA (only for unit configuration containing E2): from 13.5 mA to 16.5 mA .............................................................mA
e) Check E2 output voltage reduction (only for unit configuration containing E2): from 75 mA to 99 mA................................................................mA
f) Check E2 output voltage -15V (only for unit configuration containing E2): from -16.5 V to -13.5 V .......................................................................V

g) Check U1A output power 6.4W / 1MHz (only for unit configuration containing U1): from 5.44 W to 7.36 W.........................................................W
h) Check U1A output power 6.4W / 3MHz (only for unit configuration containing U1): from 5.44 W to 7.36 W.........................................................W
i) Check U1B output power 6.4W / 1MHz (only for unit configuration containing U1): from 5.44 W to 7.36 W.........................................................W
j) Check U1B output power 6.4W / 3MHz (only for unit configuration containing U1): from 5.44 W to 7.36 W.........................................................W

k) Check T1A output power 6.4W / 2MHz (only for unit configuration containing T1): from 5.44 W to 7.36 W .........................................................W
l) Check T1B output power 6.4W / 2MHz (only for unit configuration containing T1): from 5.44 W to 7.36 W .........................................................W

m) Check L1A laser emitting (only for unit configuration containing L1) ......................................................................... N/A YES NO
n) Check L1B laser emitting (only for unit configuration containing L1) ......................................................................... N/A YES NO
o) Check L2A laser emitting (only for unit configuration containing L2) ......................................................................... N/A YES NO
p) Check L2B laser emitting (only for unit configuration containing L2) ......................................................................... N/A YES NO

9. Check of communication with PC (by FirmwareLoader).................................................................................................................. YES NO


10. Clear all test data and make default setting of unit (format file system – DO NOT ENTRY IN THE SERVICE MODE!)............... YES NO

Date:........................................................................................................ Tested by:.....................................................................................................

11. Check again of cleaning of touch-panel, LCD display and unit body........................................................................................... YES NO
12. Mains switch on adaptor BTL-228 is in position by order (115 or 230) ......................................................................................... 115 230
13. Packaging, completing of accessories:

Date:........................................................................................................ Packaged by:....................................................................................................


Note: Empty fields are not applicable.

Page 2 of 2 JD24/05/2004
Test protocol - appendix 028-96prien100z2

Final testing and setting of assembled unit


(detailed step-by-step procedure)
Step A – point 9
Plug the adaptor to the device and plug adaptor to the mains. Switch the main switch to the "I" position. Enter the upload mode. (The upload mode is
entered by simultaneous pressing of the START/STOP1, START/STOP2 and ENTER buttons when switching the device on by the ON/OFF button.)
Using the "FirmwareLoader" program and the serial cable upload the last version of firmware to the device. Connect uploading cable to service
connector at the bottom of case (connector is under small cover – use screwdriver to remove one screw)
If the correct firmware is already loaded in the device, use the "unit info" function in the "FirmwareLoader" program to check if the device communicates
with the program.
Only for factory:
Use the correct version of the modification file for the current hardware configuration (version of PCB of the processor, type of power supply MAINS,
version of PCB of the encoder).

Type of MAINS for each unit type (use proper mdf file during first upload of firmware “028-PCBV_xxx_MAINSV_POWx.mdf”):
2610, 2615, 2621 - MAINSV_POWB 4610, 4615, 4621 - MAINSV_ POWB
2620, 2625, 2640 - MAINSV_POWA 4620, 4625, 4640 - MAINSV_POWA
2110 - MAINSV_ POWB 4110 - MAINSV_ POWB
2120 - MAINSV_POWA 4120 - MAINSV_POWA
2710, 2210 - MAINSV_POWA 4710, 4210 - MAINSV_POWA
2810S, 2815S, 2821S - MAINSV_POWA 4810S, 4815S, 4821S - MAINSV_POWA
2810T, 2815T, 2821T - MAINSV_POWA 4810T, 4815T, 4821T - MAINSV_POWA
2810L, 2815L, 2821L - MAINSV_POWA 4810L, 4815L, 4821L - MAINSV_POWA
2800SL, 2800TL - MAINSV_POWA 4800SL, 4800TL - MAINSV_POWA

After uploading enter the correct serial number using the "FirmwareLoader" – tab “Serial Number”

By order enter the correct HW_KEY mode using the "FirmwareLoader" – tab “HW key”

For OPTI model (yellow case) unit there are 6 possibilities - select one by order
“KEY_MODE_OPTI_BASIC” – 2800xx, 2x10, 2810x, 2x20
“KEY_MODE_OPTI_PLUS” – 2615, 2625, 2815x, 2825x
“KEY_MODE_OPTI_FULL” – 2621, 2640, 2821x

“KEY_MODE_OPTI_BASIC_DIAG” – 2800xx DIAG, 2x10 DIAG, 2810x DIAG, 2x20 DIAG


“KEY_MODE_OPTI_PLUS_DIAG” – 2615 DIAG, 2625 DIAG, 2815x DIAG, 2825x DIAG
“KEY_MODE_OPTI_FULL_DIAG” – 2621 DIAG, 2640 DIAG, 2821x DIAG

For PROFI model (blue case) unit there are 3 possibilities - select one by order
“KEY_MODE_PROFI_BASIC” – 4800xx, 4x10, 4810x, 4x20
“KEY_MODE_PROFI_PLUS” – 4615, 4625, 4815x, 4825x
“KEY_MODE_PROFI_FULL” – 4621, 4640, 4821x

Step B
Only for factory:
Enter "menu-menu-service functions special-factory settings". Run the "format all disks" function (after formatting the device will be restarted).
Step C – point 1
Only for factory:
• Calibrate battery – only for PROFI units (blue case).
("menu-menu-service functions special-factory settings-callibration of battery") – Measure real battery voltage by TM03 (battery voltage is
accessible on test points behind connector for firmware uploading.
• Set/check the RTC time and date.
("menu-service functions special-factory settings-setting of system time and date")
• Set/check the display contrast to be optimum.
("menu-service functions special-factory settings-syst. contrast setting")
• Set/check the system language to "English".
("menu-service functions special-factory settings-system language")

Step D
Switch the device over to the service mode (hold the ENTER button pressed when switching the device on by the ON/OFF button. The main switch is in
the "1" position and the device is plugged thru adaptor BTL-228 to the mains). Enter the password for the service mode. If the laser generator is
mounted in the device, enter first the password "0000".
Step E – point 2
After the restart enter the service mode again. Connect the proper accessories to the generator outputs: burn in laser probe for laser generator, burn-in
ultrasound head for ultrasound generator and test electro load for electro generator. Run the "burn-in" function in "menu-menu-service functions special-
factory settings-burn in" or "menu-menu-service functions special-service functions-burn in". It is recommended to let the device burn in for at least 10
hours.
For service except factory
Function is available to run from "menu-menu-service functions special-service functions-burn in"
Step F – point 3, 4
Using the TK01 device check the leakage currents and insulation.
Step G – point 5
Using the high-voltage equipment check the insulation barriers.

Appendix - Page 3 of 5 TN2003/14/05


Test protocol - appendix 028-96prien100z2

Step H – point 6
Switch the device over to the service mode.

For unit configuration containing U1


Units of BTL-4000 OPTI line calibrate only on the frequency 1 MHz, units line BTL-4000 PROFI calibrate on the both frequency 1/3 MHz.
Select tab U1. Connect accessories (1/3 MHz ultrasound heads) to the outputs of the ultrasound generator U1; the accessories are delivered together
with the device. Immerse the blinking head in water and run function "menu-specific setting-ultrasound head calibration-start". Follow the instructions on
the screen. In the middle of calibration take the head out of water, DRY IT and finish calibration. After finishing of calibration press "save" to save the
measured values in the device.
Press tab U1 to switch over to the other head (if included in the delivery) and repeat the above-described process for the other head.
If the delivery includes more than two 1/3MHz heads, unplug the calibrated heads from the output connectors of U1, plug next 1/3 MHz heads in their
places and repeat the above-described process for all 1/3MHz heads included in the delivery.

For unit configuration containing T1


Select tab T1. Connect accessories (2 MHz ultrasound heads) to the outputs of the ultrasound generator T1; the accessories are delivered together with
the device. Immerse the blinking head in water and run function "menu-specific setting-ultrasound head calibration-start". Follow the instructions on the
screen. In the middle of calibration take the head out of water, DRY IT and finish calibration. After finishing of calibration press "save" to save the
measured values in the device.
Press tab T1 to switch over to the other head (if included in the delivery) and repeat the above-described process for the other head.
If the delivery includes more than two 2MHz heads, unplug the calibrated heads from the output connectors of T1, plug next 2MHz heads in their places
and repeat the above-described process for all 2MHz heads included in the delivery.

ATTENTION
During calibration in water the metal part of the head must not touch the wall or the bottom of the vessel. The calibration vessel containing water must be
adapted against standing wave. During calibration in air the metal part of the head must not touch anything (it must not lay on the table, etc.).

Step I - point 7
Switch the device over to the service mode.
Enter "menu-menu-service functions special-factory settings". Run function "final check" and select "start".
Go successively through all points of the final inspection. Al tests must end up with the "pass" result. Fill the partial results in the report.
For service except factory
Function is available to run from "menu-menu-service functions special-service functions-final check"
to 7o) Only for PROFI unit. Unplug connector of adapter from unit. Unit must still work. Plug again connector of mains adapter, symbol of battery on the
LCD must start to display “charging”.

Step J - point 8
Switch the device to the service mode for measuring of output values (password "123456789")
to 8.a) (only for unit configuration containing E1)
Connect alternative load (1000 Ω ± 1 % / 10 W) to output E1. Switch over to tab E1. Select the MAN mode and set therapy to "galvanic current" or
program 0001. Type: continuous, mode: cc, polarity: positive. Run therapy and measure and write down the current flowing through the alternative
load.
to 8.b) (only for unit configuration containing E1)
Connect alternative load (1000 Ω ± 1 % / 10 W) to output E1. Switch over to tab E1. Select the MAN mode and set therapy to "2-pole interference" or
program 0810. Carrier frequency: 4000Hz, polarity: positive, mode cc, polarity: positive. Run therapy and set current to 100mA. Wait until (if) the
device reduces intensity and then measure and write down the current flowing through the alternative load.
to 8.c) (only for unit configuration containing E1)
Do not connect anything to output E1 (disconnect the alternative load). Switch over to tab E1. Select the MAN mode and set therapy to "galvanic
current" or program 0001. Type: continuous, mode: cv, polarity: negative. Measure and write down the voltage on the output.
to 8.d) (only for unit configuration containing E2)
Connect alternative load (1000 Ω ± 1 % / 10 W) to output E2. Switch over to tab E2. Select the MAN mode and set therapy to "galvanic current" or
program 0001. Type: continuous, mode: cc, polarity: positive. Run therapy and measure and write down the current flowing through the alternative
load.
to 8.e) (only for unit configuration containing E2)
Connect alternative load (1000 Ω ± 1 % / 10 W) to output E2. Switch over to tab E2. Select the MAN mode and set therapy to "2-pole interference" or
program 0810. Carrier frequency: 4000Hz, polarity: positive, mode cc, polarity: positive. Run therapy and set current to 100mA. Wait until (if) the
device reduces intensity and then measure and write down the current flowing through the alternative load.
to 8.f) (only for unit configuration containing E2)
Do not connect anything to output E2 (disconnect the alternative load). Switch over to tab E2. Select the MAN mode and set therapy to "galvanic
current" or program 0001. Type: continuous, mode: cv, polarity: negative. Measure and write down the voltage on the output.

to 8.g, 8.h) (only for unit configuration containing U1)


Connect the ultrasound head to output U1A. Switch over to tab U1A. Select the MAN mode and set therapy: ultrasound, carrier frequency: 1MHz, duty
factor: 100%, output power: 6.4W. Run therapy, using the ultrasound balance measure the output value on the output and write it down. After measuring
switch the carrier frequency to 3MHz, measure the output value again and write it down.
to 8.i, 8.j) (only for unit configuration containing U1)
Connect the ultrasound head to output U1B. Switch over to tab U1B. Select the MAN mode and set therapy: ultrasound, carrier frequency: 1MHz, duty
factor: 100%, output power: 6.4W. Run therapy, using the ultrasound balance measure the output value on the output and write it down. After measuring
switch the carrier frequency to 3MHz, measure the output value again and write it down.

to 8.k) (only for unit configuration containing T1)


Connect the ultrasound head to output T1A. Switch over to tab T1A. Select the MAN mode and set therapy: ultrasound, carrier frequency: 2MHz, duty
factor: 100%, output power: 6.4W. Run therapy, using the ultrasound balance measure the output value on the output and write it down.
to 8.l) (only for unit configuration containing T1)
Connect the ultrasound head to output T1B. Switch over to tab T1B. Select the MAN mode and set therapy: ultrasound, carrier frequency: 2MHz, duty
factor: 100%, output power: 6.4W. Run therapy, using the ultrasound balance measure the output value on the output and write it down.

Appendix - Page 4 of 5 TN2003/14/05


Test protocol - appendix 028-96prien100z2

to 8.m, 8.n) (only for unit configuration containing L1)


Connect the test laser probe to output L1A. Switch over to tab L1A. Select the MAN mode and set therapy: laser, dose: 5J/cm2, frequency: 0Hz
(continual), output power: maximal (by probe). Run therapy and check visually that the device is emitting laser radiation. For the red probes (685nm)
the laser radiation is visible, for the infrared probes (830nm) there shall be seen a thin red trace in the green supplementary lighting beam.
Then connect the probe to output L1B, switch over to tab L1B and repeat the test.
ATTENTION
Do not look straight into the aperture of the probe. Do not aim the laser beam into an area where could be people without protective goggles, or shiny
surfaces (mirrors, chromed things, etc.) – otherwise there is a risk of sight damage, especially with the infrared probes. For the purposes of this test
apply laser on a matt white surface (paper) and watch the reflection only on that area.
to 8.o, 8.p) (only for unit configuration containing L2)
Connect the test laser probe to output L2A. Switch over to tab L2A. Select the MAN mode and set therapy: laser, dose: 5J/cm2, frequency: 0Hz
(continual), output power: maximal (by probe). Run therapy and check visually that the device is emitting laser radiation. For the red probes (685nm)
the laser radiation is visible, for the infrared probes (830nm) there shall be seen a thin red trace in the green supplementary lighting beam.
Then connect the probe to output L2B, switch over to tab L2B and repeat the test.
ATTENTION
Do not look straight into the aperture of the probe. Do not aim the laser beam into an area where could be people without protective goggles, or shiny
surfaces (mirrors, chromed things, etc.) – otherwise there is a risk of sight damage, especially with the infrared probes. For the purposes of this test
apply laser on a matt white surface (paper) and watch the reflection only on that area.

Step K – point 10
Switch the device on in the standard regime and enter "menu-menu-unit settings-service functions". Run function "file system formatting". After
completion the device restarts (and thus sets to the default state). DO NOT ENTRY IN THE SERVICE MODE!

Step L – point 11
Check again that the touch panel as well as the whole device is clean.

Step M – point 12
Set adapter on the proper mains according order. Apply the step only if it is possible.

Step N
Perform all the still uncompleted points of the Test Report.

Appendix - Page 5 of 5 TN2003/14/05


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

A B 10,91
A A

1,36
5

°
92
°
B 92 B

51,44

57,54
C C

C C

1,11


116,62 - 0,10
112,22

8,90

1,60


1
1,11
D D

51,44

57,54
E E

1,36
F A B 1,80 F

0 A-A B-B
31,63 - 0,10

0,80 2°

91
22,60 8,91

,50
°
20,01 0,80
1,80

0,50

3,50

5,94°
G G
3,30
2

13,32°
5

1,80
91,

1,30 PASOVAT S OSTATNÍMI DÍLY SESTAVY


5,90

1,30
8,90 - 0,10

50°

1,30
,50
0

91

2,10 1 2,10

11,73 10 Zmena: Popis zmeny: Kreslil: Konstruoval: Schválil: Pred. verze:


Change No.: Change description: Drawn by: Designed by: Approved by: Prev. ver.:
22,75
33,47 Název výrobku:
H Product name: SKLÍCKO CÍSLICOVEK H
C-C Kreslil:
JM17/06/03
Materiál:
MAKROLON 2805 FARBE 750 359 svetlý
Drawn by:
Konstr: Povrch. úprava : Merítko:
Designed by: JM17/06/03 Surface finish: Scale: 2:1
Medical Technologies Schválil: List: z Císlo výkresu:
Approved by: TN18/06/03 Sheet: 1 of 2 Sheet number: 028-3201100
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

A A

B B

C C

D D

E E

F F

TYTO PLOCHY ZRCADLOVÝ LESK


OSTATNÍ PLOCHY TECHNICKÝ LESK
G G

PASOVAT S OSTATNÍMI DÍLY SESTAVY

Zmena: Popis zmeny: Kreslil: Konstruoval: Schválil: Pred. verze:


Change No.: Change description: Drawn by: Designed by: Approved by: Prev. ver.:

Název výrobku:
H Product name: SKLÍCKO CÍSLICOVEK H
Kreslil: Materiál:
Drawn by:
JM17/06/03 MAKROLON 2805 FARBE 750 359 svetlý
Konstr: Povrch. úprava : Merítko:
Designed by: JM17/06/03 Surface finish: Scale: 2:1
Medical Technologies Schválil: List: z Císlo výkresu:
Approved by: TN18/06/03 Sheet: 2 of 2 Sheet number: 028-3201100
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

A A

53
5,30
3,20
2,50

1
B B

°
95

65
°
,50
88
5,30
3,20
2,50
C C

1
91
,50
°
2

B-B

D
B B D

E E

A A

116,92

68,24
138

24,93
156

138
F F

G G

17,96 205

H H

R5

60
°
J J
R1
55,50
43
D C 48,94

D
K 46,60 K
R4
46,60 3
3,60 R572

97,82
R2
10

3
25°

5
20
2,50

5,30
3,20

23,15
23,45 PASOVAT S OSTATNÍMI DÍLY SESTAVY
4,75

L L

1 23,15
110 23,45 VŠECHNY VNEJŠÍ VIDITELNÉ PLOCHY DEZÉN VDI3400 REF.32
47,28
42

23,15
7,90

48,87

OSTATNÍ PLOCHY TECHNICKÝ LESK


2
22
13
13,50
11

2,50
6

C Zmena: Popis zmeny: Kreslil: Konstruoval: Schválil: Pred. verze:


4,20 Change No.: Change description: Drawn by: Designed by: Approved by: Prev. ver.:
0,50

30°
11,50
D-D A-A
Název výrobku:
Product name: RÁMECEK
M M
32,50 Kreslil: Materiál:
234,05 Drawn by: JM19/06/03 ABS RAL 2506015
Konstr: Povrch. úprava : Merítko:
Designed by: JM19/06/03 Surface finish: Scale: 1:1
Medical Technologies Schválil: List: z Císlo výkresu:
Approved by: TN20/06/03 Sheet: 1 of 1 Sheet number: 028-3101100
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 2 3 4

A A

40x45 10 40x45

32
32
22,63
- 0,20

38,50
45°
45°
0
44

B B
1,50
R0
,4

M
17,37

3-
3x
7

38

28
C TYTO HRANY SRAZIT C
(PRUCHOD KABELU)

4,5
0
D -2 D
22

90

E E

Zmena: Popis zmeny: Kreslil: Konstruoval: Schválil: Pred. verze:


Change No.: Change description: Drawn by: Designed by: Approved by: Prev. ver.:

101 ZMENA ŠÍRKY Z 60 NA 90 JM04/03/04 JM04/03/04 JD05/03/04 100


Název výrobku:
F Product name: DRŽÁK VENTILÁTORU F
Kreslil: Materiál:
Drawn by: JM30/09/03 11 321.21
Konstr: Povrch. úprava : Merítko:
Designed by: JM30/09/03 Surface finish: ZINKOVAT Scale: 1:1
Medical Technologies Schválil: List: z Císlo výkresu:
Approved by: TN01/10/03 Sheet: 1 of 1 Sheet number: 028-2001101
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

160
A A
157,40

116,52

3
5
35
37

°
,50
B B

88
C C

88 2,50
,50
°

1,50

2
D D

2,50
° D-D
128,67 134,60 ,50
88
123,54
A 4,17 7 4,17
15 52
52 50,18 4,17 7 2,30 35

0
R600 12

3,2
2,50
0,80
E E

1
5,5 R8
0

24,43
2,5
0 2,50 13,87

3,2
0
105,65
5,50
D D

8
35 17,50

6
F 35 F

82

24,55
35 1,40

95

25,31
1,40

0
R4

2,5
3,20

R2
R6 ,30

11,50

0,2
R0

5
95°
G 6 G

17

8,50
6
0
80

3,2 118
B
R0,
,80

30°
R0

C C

293
H H

177,40

10
333,23

2
126,87

120°
20,19

3 2
15° 2,50 3
J J

205

88,70
5,30 5
9,20

13
2,50

1
K K
13 R3

5
5
89,27 80

55,50
°
0

32°
3,2 69
29,46

R2
5
0
6,2

2,50

1
L 11 L
18

R3 3,20
3,20 8 5

2,5
0 51 R4
A
1

3
53
21,20

7,03
46,24

A-A
62,43
1

138
68
1
5,15

M M
35
31,69

3,60 2
8,15

23,30

2,50
1,30
46,60
130

8,15

R2
5,15

34

1
,80
R0
N N

1,20
65

R8

°
91
,50 1,50
9
° R0,
30 1,20
79,50

68,50

P P
50,33

26

46,85
R5

2,20

49,85 5
6,7

116,7
70,84

8
0

5
119,7 12
Q 126 39,50 PASOVAT S OSTATNÍMI DÍLY SESTAVY Q

79
VŠECHNY VNEJŠÍ VIDITELNÉ PLOCHY (SPECIFIKOVÁNO NA ZVL. VÝKRESU) DEZÉN VDI3400 REF.32
OSTATNÍ PLOCHY TECHNICKÝ LESK

5,50
5
134,21
B Zmena: Popis zmeny: Kreslil: Konstruoval: Schválil: Pred. verze:

1,30
15°

1
Approved by:

1,80
Change No.: Change description: Drawn by: Designed by: Prev. ver.:
160 92
,50 3
°
C-C
Název výrobku:
R Product name: HORNÍ DÍL R
2,50

14 Kreslil:
JM27/06/03
Materiál:
Drawn by: ABS RAL7035
51 Konstr:
JM27/06/03
Povrch. úprava :
Surface finish:
Merítko:
1:1
Designed by: Scale:
Medical Technologies Schválil: List: z Císlo výkresu:
Approved by:
TN30/06/03 Sheet: 1 of 1 Sheet number: 028-1401100
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

138,07
30 15
A A
157
18
2

5
13,20

2
80

1
12,

40

19,50

11,80
2
B B
2

12
0,97

9
°
135
16 152,89
138,28
C 142,90 C
D-D

134,60

39,50

23,30
C
2,40
D 3 B D

2,50
2,50 2
2,10

2
0

13,50

9,49
6
1,20 7,31

35,81
40 4 2,40

1,20

56,84
2
18

61,63
3,20

10°
9

E 1,50 33,84 E

72
88,14
3,20

29,72
2,50

45,50
122,80 82,50

0,70
2

18

24
1,50

F F

35 35 B 20
5

80
40

ZÁVITOVÁ VLOŽKA M4 23 1
0,30
B-B

126
88,70

G G
10

30 30 30 30
R0,5

D D
0

205
335,34
80
H H

6 1,50 6,20
1,50

40
217,50
88,70
3,20

226,50
2,50

J J
122,80
8

2,50
20 22 115
80
1,50
10,48
7,83
6

100,20

270,55
3,30
4,20

K K
1,50

16
7,20
4 1,50

2,50
2,50
0
3,2

40

20
2
9

L L
326,84 PASOVAT S OSTATNÍMI DÍLY SESTAVY
7,30

VŠECHNY VNEJŠÍ VIDITELNÉ PLOCHY DEZÉN VDI3400 REF.32


1,50
0,80

10,33
OSTATNÍ PLOCHY TECHNICKÝ LESK (VCETNE PLOCH PRO ŠTÍTKY A NOŽICKY)
5
4,52
55,30 55
45° Zmena: Popis zmeny: Kreslil: Konstruoval: Schválil: Pred. verze:
0,80 1,50 Change No.: Change description: Drawn by: Designed by: Approved by: Prev. ver.:

134,60
M
2 57
C Název výrobku:
Product name: SPODNÍ DÍL M
C-C Kreslil:
JM19/06/03
Materiál:
Drawn by: ABS RAL 7045
Konstr: Povrch. úprava : Merítko:
Designed by: JM19/06/03 Surface finish: Scale: 1:1
Medical Technologies Schválil: List: z Císlo výkresu:
Approved by: TN20/06/03 Sheet: 1 of 2 Sheet number: 028-1301100
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

A A

B B

C C

ZÁVITOVÁ VLOŽKA M4

D D

E E

F F

G G

H H

J J

K K

L L
PASOVAT S OSTATNÍMI DÍLY SESTAVY
VŠECHNY VNEJŠÍ VIDITELNÉ PLOCHY DEZÉN VDI3400 REF.32
OSTATNÍ PLOCHY TECHNICKÝ LESK

Zmena: Popis zmeny: Kreslil: Konstruoval: Schválil: Pred. verze:


Change No.: Change description: Drawn by: Designed by: Approved by: Prev. ver.:

Název výrobku:
M Product name: SPODNÍ DÍL M
Kreslil: Materiál:
Drawn by: JM19/06/03 ABS RAL7045
Konstr: Povrch. úprava : Merítko:
Designed by: JM19/06/03 Surface finish: Scale: 1:1
Medical Technologies Schválil: List: z Císlo výkresu:
Approved by: TN20/06/03 Sheet: 2 of 2 Sheet number: 028-1301100
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Medical Technologies

You might also like